3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En...
3900 Series Base Station V100R009C00
Configuration Principles (Global) Issue
06
Date
2014-03-26
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
About This Document
About This Document Overview This document describes the principles for configuring hardware in 3900 series base stations. Based on specific configuration requirements in this document, the quantities of components to be configured in a base station can be calculated and planned. The exteriors of components and cables in this document are for reference only. The actual exteriors may be different.
Product Version Product Name
Product Version
BTS3900
V100R008C00 and later. The mapping base station versions are:
BTS3900A
GBTS: V100R015C00 and later, V300R015C00 and later
BTS3900L
eGBTS: V100R015C00 and later
BTS3900AL
NodeB: V200R015C00 and later
DBS3900
eNodeB: V100R006C00 and later
BTS3900C
Intended Audience This document is intended for: l
Technical support engineers
l
System engineers
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global).................................................1 2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).............................4 3 Overview.........................................................................................................................................6 4 Version Difference........................................................................................................................9 4.1 Cabinet Configurations.................................................................................................................................................10 4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration............................................................................................................................................10 4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration..........................................................................................................................................14 4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration..........................................................................................................................................22 4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration.......................................................................................................................................25 4.1.5 DBS3900 Configurations..........................................................................................................................................28 4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration..........................................................................................................................................29 4.1.7 Cabinet Upgrade Configuration.................................................................................................................................30 4.2 BBU Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................37 4.2.1 BBU Case Configuration...........................................................................................................................................38 4.2.2 BBU Board Configuration.........................................................................................................................................40 4.2.3 CPRI Networking Configurations.............................................................................................................................59 4.3 RF Module Configuration............................................................................................................................................60
1 RF Module Configurations.................................................................................................... 0 2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)........................................................................ 0 3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)...................................................................... 0 4 RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)........................................................................ 0 5 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)...................................................................... 0 6 RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)...................................................................... 0 7 RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz)...................................................................... 0 8 RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS)............................................................................... 0 9 RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz)...................................................................... 0 Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Contents
10 RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz)..................................................................... 0 11 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)..................................................................... 0 12 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)..................................................................... 0 4.3.1 AAU Configuration...................................................................................................................................................74 4.3.2 Power Module............................................................................................................................................................84 4.3.3 RET Module Configurations...................................................................................................................................101 4.3.4 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration.....................................................................................102 4.3.5 Hardware License Configuration.............................................................................................................................150 4.4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station...............................................................................................................165 4.4.1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station....................................................................................................165 4.4.2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles....................................................................................................................166 4.4.3 Basic pRRU Configurations....................................................................................................................................168 4.5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion.......................................................................................................173 4.5.1 Typical Configurations............................................................................................................................................174 4.5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles................................................................................................................................234
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
1
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
This chapter describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).
06 (2014-03-26) This is the sixth official release. Compared with Issue 05 (2014-02-28), the content is adjusted in this issue.
05 (2014-02-28) This is the fifth official release. Compared with Issue 04 (2014-01-20), this issue includes the following new topics: l
4.4.2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles.
l
4.4.3 Basic pRRU Configurations.
l
4.4.1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station.
Compared with Issue 04 (2014-01-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.
04 (2014-01-20) This is the fourth official release. Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue includes the following new topics: l
AAU3902 Configuration.
l
4.2.3 CPRI Networking Configurations.
l
GU Co-BBP.
l
Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P Scenarios.
Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue includes the following changes. Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Topic
Change Description
4.1 Cabinet Configurations and its child topics
Added description of the BBU3910 to the configuration list.
UMTS BBU Board Configurations
Added configuration principles for the UBBP.
License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations
Added the configuration of the multimode coBBP license.
Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue does not exclude any topics.
03 (2013-11-08) This is the third commercial release. Compared with Issue 02 (2013-08-01), this issue includes the following changes: Topic
Change Description
BTS3900 Configuration List
Added the BTS3900 (Ver.D)+IMB06 configuration.
BTS3900L Configuration List
Added the BTS3900L (Ver.D)+IMB06 configuration.
02 (2013-08-01) This is the second commercial release. Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26), this issue does not include any new information or exclude any information. Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26), this issue includes the following changes: Topic
Change Description
4.2.2 BBU Board Configuration and its child topics
Added models.
01 (2013-06-26) This is the first commercial release. Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20), this issue does not include any new information. Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20), this issue includes the following changes. Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Topic
Change Description
4.3 RF Module Configuration and its child topics
Added the description of the AAU.
4.1 Cabinet Configurations and its child topics
Added the cabinet configuration list.
Draft A (20.05.13) This is a draft.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global)
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
2
Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global)
This document describes the configuration principles for single- and multi-mode 3900 series base stations.
Introduction to 3900 Series Base Stations The 3900 series base stations, which mainly comprises the baseband unit (BBU) and RF modules, use the state-of-the-art multimode technology. A uniform design is applied to various product forms and different installation scenarios. This significantly reduces operators' network construction and operating costs in site acquisition, capacity expansion, and environmental protection.The 3900 series base stations provide various solutions for evolution from GSM to UMTS and then to LTE. l
The BBU supports multimode applications. Boards working in different modes can be configured in a BBU so that any two or three among GSM, UMTS, and LTE can share the BBU. In separate-MPT scenarios, one BBU supports two modes, and two BBUs support triple modes. In co-MPT scenarios, one BBU supports triple modes.
l
RRUs and RFUs support multimode and multi-band applications. – With the SDR technology, RF modules support any two or all triple modes among GSM, UMTS and LTE by using different software configurations to meet operators' requirements. RF modules of different modes can be deployed at one base station. Therefore, a base station can work in a single mode or any two or all triple modes among GSM, UMTS and LTE. – RF modules working in different frequency bands can also be used together. – Blade RRUs include RRU3936/RRU3938/RRU3939, RRU3824/RRU3826/RRU3838/ RRU3832/RRU3839, and RRU3268/RRU3260. – High-power RFUs are as follows: MRFUd/MRFUe/WRFUd/WRFUe/CRFUd used together with the BTS3900 (Ver.C/Ver.D) cabinet. – High-power RRUs are as follows: RRU3829/RRU3929/RRU3942/RRU3841/ RRU3961/RRU3832/RRU3839/RRU3939 that are used together with the DCDU-11B/ DCDU-12B. All other RRUs are low-power RRUs. In addition, the 2100 MHz AAU3910 and AWS AAU3910 are also high-power RF modules.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global)
NOTE
The BBU in this document includes the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Description The following table describes the meanings of some symbols and phrases in the document. Table 2-1 Symbol meanings
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Symbol
Description
&
It is used between different modes in a separate-MPT base station.For example, GSM&UMTS indicates a separate-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station, which can be shortened to GU.
*
It is used between different modes in a co-MPT base station. For example, GSM*UMTS indicates a co-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station, which can be shortened to G*U.
+
It is used between different modes for the two BBUs in a separate-MPT base station.For example, GSM&UMTS+LTE indicates a separate-MPT GSM/ UMTS/LTE triple-mode base station, which can be shortened to GU+L.
[]
the modes contained in [] share the same main control board. For example, GSM [UMTS*LTE] can be shortened to G[U*L].
_
The mode following the underscore next to UMPT or UBBP is the actual mode in which the UMPT or UBBP is working. For example, UMPT_GUL is a UMPT working in GUL mode and UBBP_UL is a UBBP working in UL mode.
GU SDR
GSM and UMTS share the same RF modules.
GL SDR
GSM and LTE share the same RF modules.
UL SDR
UMTS and LTE share the same RF modules.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
3 Overview
3
Overview
SRAN9.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN9.0 are GBSS16.0, RAN16.0, and eRAN7.0. Compared with SRAN8.0, SRAN9.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the 1.8 A AAU3902 in GL mode.
l
Added the UBBP and BBU3910. A BBU3910 can be installed in the following cabinets: BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900A (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), IMB03, OMB (Ver.C) (applies to DBS3900 and BTS3900C (Ver.C)), and BTS3900AL (Ver.A).
l
Added the Cloud BB solution.
l
Added the multimode baseband license.
l
Added configurations for the Lampsite solution.
l
Added the ODM and OFD.
SRAN8.1 The single-mode versions for SRAN8.1 are GBSS15.1, RAN15.1, and eRAN6.1. Compared with SRAN8.0, SRAN8.1 includes the following changes: l
Added the following RF modules: EGSM, PGSM, and RRU3938 (1800 MHz)
l
Added the RRU3268 800 MHz for eRAN6.1.
l
Added the AAU3902 (1.8 A) working in the LTE only mode.
l
Added the GULT quadruple mode.
SRAN8.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN8.0 are GBSS15.0, RAN15.0, and eRAN6.0. Compared with SRAN7.0, SRAN8.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the following new hardware: UBRIb, UMPTb1, LBBPd3, , and UTRPa.
l
Added the AAU3910, which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2600 MHz, or AWS.
l
Added the AAU3902 (2100 MHz).
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
3 Overview
l
Added the RRU3926 in GL mode.
l
Specified specifications of HSPA user number supported by a WBBP.
l
Added the GU/GL/UL/GUL co-MPT configurations.
l
Added the following RF modules: RRU3260 (2600 MHz), RRU3268 (2600 MHz), RRU3939 (1800 MHz), and RRU3936 (850 MHz and 1900 MHz).
l
Added the AAU3910, which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2600 MHz, or AWS in SRAN8.0.
l
Added the RRU3808 of AWS working in UL mode.
SRAN7.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN7.0 are GBSS14.0, RAN14.0, and eRAN3.0. Compared with SRAN6.0, SRAN7.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the following hardware: the UTRPc (transmission extension board), BBU interconnection port, UTRPa, UCIU (interconnection board), UMPTa1 (UMTS main control board), WBBPf (UMTS baseband processing board), LBBPd (LTE baseband processing board), UMPTa2 (LTE main control board), LRFUe (2600 MHz), MRFUe (E900M), RRU3841 (AWS), RRU3942 (850 MHz), CRFUd (AWS), and UMPTb1 (only for UMTS).
l
Added the following LTE hardware licenses: Resource Block License, BB Receive Channel License, BB Transmit Channel, RF Transmit Channel, and RF Receive Channel.
l
Added UMTS NodeB Signaling Capacity License.
l
Added the configuration scenarios where SDR RF modules are connected by means of BBU interconnection.
l
Added configurations for GUL modes, such as GSM&UMTS+LTE (GSM), GSM<E +UMTS (GSM), GSM&UMTS+UMTS<E, GSM&UMTS+UMTS<E (GSM). NOTE
In triple-mode configurations, LTE (GSM) or UMTS (GSM) indicates that LTE or UMTS uses one BBU and shares SDR RF modules with GSM in the other BBU. Therefore, the SDR RF modules must be connected across BBUs in a star topology to support GL or GU. GSM is contained in brackets because a GTMU board is not configured in the BBU which is only used by LTE or UMTS.
l
Added configurations for GUL triple-mode co-transmission
l
Added configurations for GUL triple-mode common clock.
l
Added the RRU3942 of 1900 MHz in UL mode.
l l
The BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet can be stacked on an IMS06 which houses transmission equipment or 92 Ah storage batteries.
eRAN2.2 eRAN2.2 is an LTE only version. Compared with eRAN2.1, eRAN2.2 includes the following changes: l
Added the following features in eRAN2.2: UL 2x4 MU-MIMO and DL 4x4 MIMO.
l
Added dual-carrier configurations.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
3 Overview
SRAN6.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN6.0 are GBSS13.0, RAN13.0, and eRAN2.1. Compared with SRAN5.0, SRAN6.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the following hardware: RF modules of Band 13 (700 MHz), RF modules of Band 20 (800 MHz), MRFU V2 of Band 5 (850 MHz), MRFUd of P900M/E900M, MRFUd of Band 2 (1800 MHz), RRU3929 of E900M, RRU3928 of 900 MHz, RRU3929 of 1800 MHz, RRU3928 of 1800 MHz, LRFUe of 800 MHz, RRU3240 of 2600 MHz, RRU3942 of 1900 MHz, RRU3926 of 900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM, RRU3929 of P900M, WRFUe of 2100 MHz, RRU3936 of 900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM, WRFUa of 2100 MHz (100 W), and RRU3221 of 2600 MHz, enhanced WRFU of 2100 MHz (80 W), RRU3839 of 2100 MHz, RRU3832 of AWS, RRU3938 of EGSM/ PGSM/1800 MHz, enhanced MRFUd, and RRU3939 of 1800 MHz.
l
Added the maximum configuration of six UMTS baseband processing boards.
l
Added a new cabinet, which is required by the MRFUd, WRFUd, LRFUe, and MRFUe. The new cabinet supports the GUL triple modes, including the GSM&UMTS+LTE and GSM<E+UMTS modes.
l
Added the following SRAN6.0 dual-mode features: GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing and 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation between GSM and UMTS Mode.
l
Added the following RAN13.0 features: E-DPCCH Boosting, DC-HSDPA+MIMO, Dualthreshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation, NodeB Internal Firewall, Anti-interference Scheduling for HSUPA, Traffic-based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier in Multi-carrier, Multi-carrier Switch off Based on QoS, Intelligent Power Management, Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell, CQI Adjustment, and MIMO prime.
l
Added the following eRAN2.1 features: TTI Bundling, LoCation Services (LCS), and Cell Outage Detection and Compensation.
l
Added the GSM high power 80 W license.
l
Added the BTS3900(AC) Ver.D and BTS3900L(AC) Ver.D cabinets for 220 V AC scenarios.
SRAN 5.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN5.0 are GBSS12.0, RAN12.0, and eRAN2.0. Compared with SRAN3.0, SRAN5.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the following hardware: WBBPd (UMTS baseband board), UTRPb4 (GSM transmission board), RRU3806 of 2100 MHz (80 W), RRU3808 of AWS, RRU3824 of 2100 MHz, RRU3826 of 2100 MHz, RRU3838 of 2100 MHz, RRU3832 of 2100 MHz, WRFUd of 2100 MHz, RRU3828 of 2100 MHz, and RRU3829 of 2100 MHz.
l
Added the following SRAN5.0 dual-mode features: Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing and Bandwidth Sharing of MBTS in Multi-mode Co-Transmission.
l
Added the following RAN12.0 features: Interference Cancellation (IC), Frequency Domain Equalization (FDE), UL L2 Enhanced, DL 64QAM+MIMO, UL 16QAM, DC-HSDPA, and Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.
l
Added the GSM high power 60 W license.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
4
Version Difference
About This Chapter This chapter describes the principles for configuringDBS3900BTS3900C. 4.1 Cabinet Configurations 4.2 BBU Configuration 4.3 RF Module Configuration 4.4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station 4.5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
4.1 Cabinet Configurations 3900 series base stations adopt a module design. A macro base station consists of the cabinet, BBU, and RF modules. Its minimum configuration consists of a cabinet and the minimum configuration of baseband processing boards, main control and transmission boards, and RF modules. A distributed base station consists of baseband processing boards and RF modules. Its minimum configuration consists of the minimum configuration of baseband processing boards, main control and transmission boards, and RF modules. The baseband processing boards, RF modules, and transmission interface boards support smooth capacity expansion by adding related boards or licenses.
4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900 site.
BTS3900 configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900 configuration principles. Table 4-1 BTS3900 configuration principles Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station
Maximum Number of Cabinets
Maximum Number of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Description
Single- or dualmode base station
2
1
l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
-
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station
Maximum Number of Cabinets
Maximum Number of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Description
Separate-MPT triple-mode base station
2
2
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
For high-power RRUs, see2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).
If RFUs and RRUs are configured: l A Ver.B or Ver.C cabinet supports a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs. The DCDU supplying power to RRUs must be installed on a wall outside the cabinet. l A site that uses Ver.D cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and 3 low-power RRUs. The DCDU supplying power to RRUs can be installed in the BTS3900 cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station
Maximum Number of Cabinets
Maximum Number of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Description
Co-MPT triplemode base station
2
1
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
-
If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.
NOTE
l A single Ver.B or Ver.C AC cabinet can house a maximum of one BBU. A single Ver.D cabinet can house a maximum of two BBUs. l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used. l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used. l The BTS3900 (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) AC cabinet and +24 V DC BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet can neither be configured as a separate-MPT triple-mode base station nor be configured with RFUs and RRUs together. The Ver.D AC cabinet can be configured with a maximum of 6 RFUs and 9 RRUs.
BTS3900 Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900 cabinets and their internal devices. Table 4-2 Configuration list
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2B48RACK00
BTS3900 Cabinet (DC -48V)
WD2B48RACK03
BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900 indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to scenarios with AC backup power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2P048CAB10
BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.D, DC -48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900 indoor macro base station, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC scenarios with backup power and 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power. One piece of DC cabinet can be configured in 220 V AC scenarios without backup power when the site needs to be configured with 7 to 11 RFUs.
WD2PACRACK00
BTS3900 Cabinet (AC 220V/110V)
WD2BACRACK01
BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 220V/110V)
220 V AC or 110 V AC indoor macro cabinet for housing the power module, BBUs, and RFUs
WD2P220CAB00
BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.D, 220VAC)
220 V AC indoor macro cabinet, consisting of a BTS3900 cabinet and an IMS06 stacked together. The IMS06 can house a 5 U AC power device. It is supported from SRAN6.0 onwards. In 220 V AC scenarios without backup power, one piece is configured by default. When two cabinets need to be configured, the site can be configured with one AC cabinet and one DC cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
WD2M048BBU01
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2M3910BBU0
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
NOTE
When the BTS3900 is stacked on two IMS06s, an EPU05A and a group of battaries (92 Ah) or an EPU05A and two transmission devices can be installed.
4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900A site.
BTS3900A configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900A configuration principles. Table 4-3 BTS3900A configuration principles Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station
Maximum Number of Cabinets
Maxim um Numbe r of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Remarks
Single- or dual-mode base station
l A BTS3900A site can uses Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets supports a maximum of two groups of APM30H +RFC.
1
l If only RFUs need to be configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
For high-power RRUs, see2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).
SeparateMPT triplemode base station Co-MPT triple-mode base station
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
l A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.D cabinets supports a maximum of one APM30H and two RFCs.
2
1
l If RFUs and RRUs need to be configured: A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets supports a maximum of 6 RFUs and 6 RRUs. A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.D cabinets support a maximum of 6 RFUs, 6 highpower RRUs, and 3 low-power RRUs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
NOTE
l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used. l When RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used.
BTS3900A Configuration List The following table lists the BTS3900A cabinets and their internal devices. Table 4-4 Configuration list Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2P022APM03
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 220V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 220 V AC power
WD2P022APM04
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 220V)
WD2P022APM05
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 220V)
WD2P022APM06
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 220V)
WD2P011APM03
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 110V)
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 220 V AC power, with a heat exchanger By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. The cabinet of the 05/06 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C. Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 110 V AC power By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2B048APM03
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, -48V)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with -48 V DC power 15
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2B048APM04
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, DC -48V)
WD2B048APM07
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, DC -48V)
WD2B048APM06
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, DC -48V)
WD2B226RFU03
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet
WD2B226RFU04
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet
WD2B116RFU03
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet
Outdoor macro cabinet housing RFUs for a BTS3900A site supplied with 110 V AC power
WD2M048BBU01
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2M3910BBU0
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
WD2P022CAB00
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 220V)
220 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC.
Outdoor cabinet (APM30) with heating film, used for a BTS3900A site supplied with -48 V DC power For a cabinet with heating film, the customer needs to provide independent power supply for the heating film. BTS3900A cabinet, used for housing RFUs
In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In 220 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2P022CAB01
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 220V)
the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. The cabinet of the 01 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C.
WD2P011CAB00
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 110V)
110 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P048CAB00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48V)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
-48 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC.
17
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2P048CAB01
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48V)
In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In -48 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. The cabinet of the 01 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C.
WD2B226RFU05
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet (Ver.C)
Outdoor macro cabinet housing RFUs for a BTS3900A site When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. This item is configured when an RFU cabinet is required. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2P022CAB21
BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D, 220V AC)
Outdoor cabinets for stacked installation at a BTS3900A site supplied with 220V DC power. This package contains an APM30 and an RFC. When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In 220 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2P022CAB22
BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D, 220V AC)
Outdoor cabinets for stacked installation at a BTS3900A site supplied with 110V DC power. This package contains an APM30 and an RFC. When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2P011CAB23
BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D, 110V AC)
Outdoor cabinets for stacked installation at a BTS3900A site supplied with 110V DC power. This package contains an APM30 and an RFC. When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P048CAB24
BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D, -48V DC)
Outdoor cabinets for stacked installation at a BTS3900A site supplied with -48 V DC power. This package contains an APM30 and an RFC. When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In -48 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2P048CAB25
BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D, -48V DC)
When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In -48 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes.
WD2B226RFU11
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet (Ver.D, -48V DC)
Outdoor macro cabinet housing RFUs for a BTS3900A site When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. This item is configured when an RFU cabinet is required. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required.
4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900L site.
BTS3900L configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900L configuration principles.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-5 BTS3900L configuration principles Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station
Maximum Number of Cabinets
Maximu m Number of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Description
Single- or dual-mode base station
1
1
l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
-
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported. Separate-MPT triple-mode base station
1
2
l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
For high-power RRUs, see2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).
l If RFUs and RRUs need to be configured: A BTS3900L site that uses Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs. A BTS3900L site that uses Ver.D cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs, 6 highpower RRUs, and 3 low-power RRUs. Co-MPT triple-mode base station
1
1
l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
-
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
NOTE
l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used. l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used.
BTS3900L Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900L cabinets and their internal devices. Table 4-6 Configuration list
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Counter Description
Function
WD2B48RACK01
BTS3900L Cabinet (DC -48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.B) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power.
WD2B48RACK04
BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.C) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power.
WD2P048CABL1
BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.D, DC -48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.D) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC scenarios with backup power and 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power.
WD2P220CAB01
BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.D, 220VAC)
220 V AC BTS3900L (Ver.D) indoor macro base station, which consists of a BTS3900L cabinet stacked on an IMS06. It houses the EPU05A, BBUs, and RFUs. It is supported from SRAN6.0 onwards.
WD2M048BBU01
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Counter Description
Function
WD2M3910BBU0
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900AL site.
BTS3900AL configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900AL configuration principles. Table 4-7 BTS3900AL configuration principles Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station
Maximu m Number of Cabinet s
Maxim um Numbe r of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Description
Single- or dual-mode base station
A maximu m of two BTS3900 AL cabinets (1 BTS3900 AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900 AL DC cabinet)
1
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported.
For high-power RRUs, see2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).
SeparateMPT triplemode base station
If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9 RFUs and 9 RRUs are supported. 2
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported. If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9 RFUs and 12 RRUs are supported.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station
4 Version Difference
Maximu m Number of Cabinet s
Co-MPT triple-mode base station
Maxim um Numbe r of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
1
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported.
Description
If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9 RFUs and 9 RRUs are supported.
NOTE
If a site is configured with two BTS3900AL cabinets. the two cabinets must be installed side by side with the BTS3900AL DC cabinet on the right.
BTS3900AL Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900AL cabinets and their internal devices. Table 4-8 Configuration list
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Counter Description
Function
WD2P048BBU00
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2P3910BBU0
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Counter Description
Function
WD5P0ACCAB00
BTS3900AL Cabinet (AC 220V/110V)
BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V outdoor cabinet In 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of one AC outdoor macro cabinet and one DC outdoor macro cabinet. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 2 BBUs.
WD5P0ACCAB01
BTS3900AL Cabinet (AC 220V/110V)
BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V outdoor cabinet, used in cold areas In 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of one AC outdoor macro cabinet and one DC outdoor macro cabinet. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 2 BBUs.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Counter Description
Function
WD5P0DCCAB00
BTS3900AL Cabinet (DC -48V)
BTS3900AL -48 V DC outdoor cabinet When a site is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet or two BTS3900AL DC cabinets can be configured to support a maximum of 18 RFUs. The DC cabinet is powered by the AC cabinet. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs.
WD5P0DCCAB01
BTS3900AL Cabinet (DC -48V)
BTS3900AL -48 V DC outdoor cabinet, used in cold areas When a site is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet or two BTS3900AL DC cabinets can be configured to support a maximum of 18 RFUs. The DC cabinet is powered by the AC cabinet. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs.
4.1.5 DBS3900 Configurations The OMB cabinet is an outdoor power cabinet and provides no backup power. It is used for the DBS3900 and cannot be configured with an APM30 series power cabinet.
OMB Configurations The following table lists the cabinets used by the OMB and their components.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-9 Configuration list External Model
Description
Function
QWMB0OMBAC00
OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, 220/110 V AC)
This is an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power. Each cabinet supports a maximum of six RRUs and one BBU. Each site can be configured with a maximum of one cabinet.
QWMB0OMBDC00
OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, -48 V DC)
This is an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power. Each cabinet supports a maximum of six RRUs and one BBU. Each site can be configured with a maximum of one cabinet.
WD2MR4850G00
PSU Module (AC/DC)
This is a power supply module. One PSU is configured when the OMB (Ver.C) AC cabinet uses four to six DC RRUs.
4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900C site.
BTS3900C Configuration Principles The following table lists the BTS3900C configuration principles. Table 4-10 BTS3900C configuration principles
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Cabinet Configuration
Maximum Number of BBUs
RF Module Configuratio n
Remarks
BTS3900C (Ver.C), consisting of an OMB (Ver.C) and an RRU subrack
1
Only one RRU can be configured.
It applies to a single- or multimode base station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
BTS3900C Configuration List The following table lists the cabinets used by the BTS3900C and their internal devices. Table 4-11 Configuration list Model
Description
Function
QWMB0OMBAC00
OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, 220/110V AC)
OMB (Ver.C) supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
QWMB0OMBDC00
OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, -48V DC)
OMB (Ver.C) supplied with -48 V DC power
WD2M048BBU01
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2M3910BBU0
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
4.1.7 Cabinet Upgrade Configuration The cabinet upgrade solution aims to replace components in a cabinet whose version is earlier than Ver.D with components designed for a Ver.D cabinet so that the restructured cabinet has the same capabilities of power supply, power distribution, and heat dissipation as a Ver.D cabinet. This solution facilitates the evolution to SingleRAN.
BTS3900 The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-12 BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B00AD 4800
BTS3900 Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet to a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios.
2
l Optional.
BTS3900 Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet to a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios.
2
WD2B00BD 4800
l When a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900 cabinet upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans. l Optional. l When a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900 cabinet upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
BTS3900L The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-13 BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B0LBD 4800
BTS3900L Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet to a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios.
1
l Optional. l When a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900L cabinet upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
BTS3900A The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900A cabinet upgrade packages. The battery cabinet for the original base station also needs to be upgraded. For details about the configuration of battery cabinet upgrade packages, see related APM30 configuration manuals. Table 4-14 BTS3900A (Ver.A) cabinet upgrade packages
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B220A 2D00
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.1 to Ver.D, 220VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
32
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B110A 2D00
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.1 to Ver.D, 110VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.1 to Ver.D, -48VDC, TMC11H, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.2 to Ver.D, 220VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 302) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
WD2BA48A 2D00
WD2B220A 2D02
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, and fans.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
33
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B110A 2D02
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.2 to Ver.D, 110VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 302) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.2 to Ver.D, -48VDC, TMC11H, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 302) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver.A) to an RFC (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
WD2BA48A 2D02
WD2BR48A 2D00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, and fans.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l When an RFC (Ver.A) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
34
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-15 BTS3900A (Ver.B) cabinet upgrade packages Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B220B2 D00
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, 220VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.B) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, 110VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.B) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, -48VDC, TMC11H, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.B) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
WD2B110B2 D00
WD2BN48B 2D00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, and fans.
35
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2BR48B 2D00
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver.B) to an RFC (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional. l When an RFC (Ver.B) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
Table 4-16 BTS3900A (Ver.C) cabinet upgrade packages
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B220C 2D00
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.C to Ver.D, 220VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.C) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
36
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B110C 2D00
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.C to Ver.D, 110VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.C) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.C to Ver.D, -48VDC, TMC11H, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.C) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.C to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver.C) to an RFC (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
WD2BC48 C2D00
WD2BR48 C2D00
l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, and fans. l Optional. l When an RFC (Ver.C) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
4.2 BBU Configuration This section describes the number of BBUs configured in various types of base stations, the number of different types of boards in the BBU, and the slot assignment principles.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
4.2.1 BBU Case Configuration The BBU is a mandatory component in 3900 series base stations. Different principles apply to the BBU configuration in different types of base stations. The following table lists the principles for configuring BBU cases in single-, dual-, and triplemode base stations. Table 4-17 BBU Case Configuration Principle Single/Dual/TripleMode Base Station
Configured Mode
BBU Case Configuration Principle
Single-mode base station
GSM
One BBU is configured.
UMTS
One BBU is configured.
LTE
One BBU is configured.
GU
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a GTMU/UMPT_G and a WMPT/UMPT_U.
G*U
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in G*U (coMPT) mode.
GL
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a GTMU/UMPT_G and an LMPT/UMPT_L.
G*L
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in G*L (coMPT) mode.
UL
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a WMPT/UMPT_U and an LMPT/UMPT_L.
U*L
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in U*L (coMPT) mode.
UT
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a WMPT/UMPT_U and an LMPT/UMPT_T.
Dual-mode base station
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Single/Dual/TripleMode Base Station
Separate-MPT triple-mode base station
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Configured Mode
BBU Case Configuration Principle
L*T
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in L*T (coMPT) mode.
GU+L
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is used by LTE.
GL+U
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and LTE, and the other BBU is used by UMTS.
GU+UL
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is shared by UMTS and LTE.
GU+L(G)
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is used by LTE. The two BBUs are interconnected.
GL+U(G)
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and LTE, and the other BBU is used by UMTS. The two BBUs are interconnected.
GU+UL(G)
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is shared by UMTS and LTE. The two BBUs are interconnected.
G[U*L]
Three modes share one BBU. The UMTS and LTE modes share a UMPT, and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Single/Dual/TripleMode Base Station
Co-MPT triple-mode base station
Configured Mode
BBU Case Configuration Principle
G[L*T]
Three modes share one BBU. The LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT, and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.
U[L*T]
Three modes share one BBU. The LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT, and the UMTS mode is supported by a WMPT/UMPT_U.
G[U*T]
Three modes share one BBU. The UMTS and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT, and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.
G*U*L
The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.
G*U*T
The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.
G*L*T
The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.
U*L*T
The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU. U*L*T
Quadruple-mode base station with co-MPT
G*U*L*T
The four modes share one UMPT in one BBU.
GU+[L*T](G)
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is shared by LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
4.2.2 BBU Board Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring various types of boards in the BBU.
GSM BBU Board Configurations The following table lists the GSM BBU board configurations. Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections: l For carrier specifications, see Capacity Specifications. l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications. l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
Table 4-18 GSM BBU board configurations Model
Descrip tion
Functio n
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
GM5D0 0GTMU 01
GSM Main Control and Transpor t Unit (4E1&1 electrica l FE&1op tical FE)
GSM Transmi ssion & Timing & Manage ment Unit type b (GTMU b)
1
A GTMUb must be configured in the following base stations: l The base station is a GBTS l Separate-MPT multimode base station including a GBTS
l Provi des four E1s. l Provi des one FE electr ical port. l Provi des six CPRI ports.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descrip tion
Functio n
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
GM5D0 0UBRI0 0
Universa l BaseBan d Radio Interface Board (6CPRI interface )
Universa l baseban d radio interface unit for GSM (UBRI)
1
The UBRI needs to be configured in the following scenarios:
Provides six CPRI ports.
l More than six CPRI ports are required by GSM. l RFUs and RRUs are configured, which include RRUs or RFUs in GSM mode. l A UBRIb needs to be configured to provide CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT where co-MPT is applied.
UMTS BBU Board Configurations NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications. l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband Specifications. l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
The following table lists the UMTS BBU board configurations.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-19 Configurations of the UMTS main control board Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Numbe r to Be Configu red in a Single BBU
Configuration Principle
QWMD00 WMPT00
WCDMA Main Control and Transport Unit (4E1&1Electric al FE&1Optical FE)
WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT)
1
One WMPT or UMPTa1 must be configured in a base station of which the supported modes include UMTS, but the UMPTa1 and WMPT cannot be configured in the same BBU.
l Provides four E1s/ T1s. l Provides one FE electrical port. l Provides one FE optical port.
The main control board can be configured in 1+1 backup mode for UMTS only, instead for GU or UL. When 1+1 backup is used, two main control boards in the same mode are configured in one BBU. Since SRAN7.0 or RAN14.0, the UMPTa1 is recommended. The UMPTa1 is required when a newly deployed site meets any of the following conditions: 1. IPSec as well as PKI is supported. 2. The signaling processing capability exceeds 170 CNBAP/s. 3. UMTS is served by the leaf BBU, and BBU interconnection is implemented by connecting the UCIU and UMPT. 4. There is a need for UMTS-to-LTE evolution. 5. This board can also be configured when co-
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Numbe r to Be Configu red in a Single BBU
WD2D0UM PT100
Universal Main Processing and Transmission Board (4 E1s & 1 Electrical FE/ GE port & 1 Optical FE/GE port, UMPTa1)
Universal main processing and transmission unit type a1 (UMPTa1)
1
Configuration Principle
transmission is applied and the GSM IPSec or GSM PKI function is enabled. Since SRAN8.0, the UMPTa1 allows any two or all triple modes of GSM, UMTS, and LTE to share one main control board.
l Provides four E1s/ T1s. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. l Provides one CI port.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
QWMDWB BPD100
Baseband Processing Unit (6 Cell, CE: UL192/DL192)
QWMDWB BPD300
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL256/ DL256)
WCDMA baseband processing board
6
l A WBBPdx provides six CPRI ports.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The number of WBBPs to be configured in a base station depends on the number of cells, number of uplink and downlink CEs, signaling processing capability, and number of CPRI ports to be supported by the base station.
44
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Function
QWMDWB BPD200
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL384/ DL384)
l A WBBPfx provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
QWMDWB BPF101
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL192/ DL256)
QWMDWB BPF201
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL256/ DL384)
QWMDWB BPF301
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL384/ DL512)
QWMDWB BPF400
Maxim um Numbe r to Be Configu red in a Single BBU
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL512/ DL768)
Configuration Principle
When the DC-HSDPA +MIMO feature is used: l If the WBBPd, WBBPf1, WBBPf2, or WBBPf3 is used, each sector must be configured with one WBBP. l If the WBBPf4 is used, every three sectors are configured with one WBBP. When the feature Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell is used: l If the WBBPd2 or WBBPd3 is used, a cell can be shared by a maximum of six RRUs (2RX). l If the WBBPd1 is used, a cell can be shared by a maximum of three RRUs (2RX). The WBBPd and WBBPf can be configured in the same base station.
LTE BBU Board Configurations This section describes the configuration principles for LTE BBU boards. The following table lists the LTE BBU board configurations.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications. l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband Specifications. l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
Table 4-20 LTE BBU board configurations Model
Descript ion
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2D00LM PT00
LTE Main Processin g& Transmis sion Unit (With GPS Card)
LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT)
1
One LMPT or UMPTa2 must be configured in a base station of which the supported modes include LTE, but the UMPTa2 and LMPT cannot be configured in the same BBU.
Universal Main Processin g and Transmis sion Board (4 E1s & 1 Electrical FE/GE port & 1 Optical FE/GE port, UMPTa2)
Universal main processing and transmission unit type a2 (UMPTa2)
LTE Baseband Processin g Unit C
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPc): provides six CPRI ports.
WD2D00UM PT01
WD2D0LBB PC00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
l Provides two FE/GE electrical ports. l Provides two FE/GE optical ports. l Contains a GPS satellite card. 1
l Provides one FE/GE electrical port.
The main control board can be configured in 1+1 backup mode for LTE only, instead for GL or UL. In LTE or SRAN scenarios, two UMPT boards can share a signaling resource pool.
l Provides one FE/GE optical port. l Provides four E1s/T1s.
Since SRAN8.0, the UMPTa2 allows any two or all triple modes of GSM, UMTS, and LTE to share one main control board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
The number of LBBPs to be configured in a base station that supports LTE depends on the number of cells, bandwidth, antenna configuration, and 46
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descript ion
Function
WD2DLBBP D100
LTE Baseband Processin g Unit D1
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd1): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
WD2DLBBP D101
LTE Baseband Processin g Unit D1
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd1): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
WD2D0LBB PD02
LTE Baseband Processin g Unit D2
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd2): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
number of CPRI ports to be supported by the base station. A BBU in LTE mode is configured with at least one LBBP, and each LBBP is configured with a maximum of six RF modules. The LBBPc and LBBPd can be configured in the same base station. When the LBBPc is configured: l In SISO, DL 2x2 MIMO, and UL 2x2 MU-MIMO modes, one LBBPc supports three cells, each with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz. l When DL 4x2 MIMO or UL 4antenna receive diversity is used, one LBBPc supports three cells, each with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10 MHz, or one cell with a scalable bandwidth of 15/20 MHz. l When DL 2x2 MIMO and UL 2x2 MU-MIMO is used, the three
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descript ion
Function
WD2D0LBB PD03
LTE Baseband
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd3): Provides
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
cells supported by a single LBBPc can be configured with different bandwidth, for example, 3 x (5 MHz/10 MHz+10 MHz) or (15 MHz +5 MHz+5 MHz). When the LBBPd is configured: l When 2x2 MIMO is used, each LBBPd1 supports a maximum of three cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz. l When 2x2 MIMO, 4x2 MIMO, or 4way receive diversity is used, each LBBPd2 supports a maximum of three cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz. l When 2x2 MIMO is used, each LBBPd3 supports a maximum of six cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz, and the six cells can use different bandwidth.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Model
4 Version Difference
Descript ion
Function
Processin g Unit D3
six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2DLBBPD100 will no longer be sold but will gradually be replaced by WD2DLBBPD101.
Common Board Configurations This section describes the principles for configuring common boards in a BBU. The following table lists the principles for configuring common main control board, power and environment interface unit, and baseband processing board in the BBU. NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications. l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband Specifications. l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-21 Main control board, power and environment interface unit, and baseband processing board External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00 0PEU03
HERT BBU WD2MUPE UC, -48 V Power and Environment Interface Unit
HERT BBU WD2MUPEUC, -48 V Power and Environment Interface Unit
2
At a new site, the BBU (02319940) is configured with a UPEUc board by default, which provides 360 W power. If power backup (less than or equal to 360 W) is required or high-power RRUs (greater than 360 W and less than or equal to 650 W) need to be configured, one more UPEUc board needs to be configured.
Power supply module of 360 W in a BBU.
At a site where capacity needs to be expanded, if one or two UPEUa boards have been configured, replace the UPEUa board with two UPEUc boards. If a UPEUc board has been configured before capacity expansion, add a UPEUc board. The UPEUa and UPEUc boards cannot be configured together. The UPEUa and UPEUc boards use different designs. If they are configured together, the total power supply capacity ranges from 330 W to 360 W. Therefore, if the power consumption of a BBU is 360 W and the UPEUc board malfunctions, only the UPEUa board in the BBU supplies power and the power consumption of the BBU exceeds the maximum power supply of the UPEUa board. As a result, the BBU will be powered off.
WD2M00 PEIUD2
Function Module,HE RT BBU,WD2 MUPEUD2, Power and Environment Interface Unit(-48 V)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Function Module, HERT BBU,WD2MUPE UD2, Power and Environment Interface Unit (-48 V) Power supply module of 650 W in a BBU.
2
At a new site, the BBU (02310JJE) is configured with a UPEUd board by default, which provides 650 W power. If power backup (less than or equal to 650 W) is required, one more UPEUd board needs to be configured. At a site where capacity needs to be expanded, the capability of circuit breakers must be greater than or equal to 20 A because the circuit breakers of existing cabinets need to be restructured during the capacity expansion.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DU MPTB10 0
Universal Main Processing and Transmissio n Board (4E1&1 Electrical FE/GE&1 Optical FE/ GE, UMPTb1)
UMPTb1, universal main processing and transmission board
In a coMPT multimod e base station or a hybridMPT base station configure d with one BBU: 1
A UMPTb1 must be configured in an eGBTS.
l Provides four E1s/T1s. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. l Provides one CI port.
In a coMPT multimod e base station or a hybridMPT base station configure d with two BBUs: 2 In a separateMPT base station: l One BBU: 2 l BBU interco nnecti on: 2
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
The UMPTb1 in UMTS mode is configured in the following scenarios: l From RAN14.0 onwards, this board can be configured to support the UMTS mode. l The base stations need to supportIPSec and PKI features. l The signaling specification exceeds 170 CNBAP/s. l There is a requirement for UMTS-to-LTE transition. l The UMPTb1 working in UMTS mode cannot be configured in the BBU where a WMPT is configured. The UMPTb1 board working in LTE mode cannot be configured in the BBU where an LMPT board has been configured. The UMPTb1 in multi-mode is configured in the following scenarios: l From SRAN8.0 onwards, the UMPTb1 board is recommended for single-mode and multimode base stations. l A UMPTb1 is mandatory in a co-MPT multimode base station. l A UMPTb1 is optional in the GU or GL multimode co-transmission scenarios where the GSM needs to supportIPSec and PKI features. l A separate-MPT base station needs to use UCIU+UMPT interconnection. In this case, a UMPTb1 must be configured in BBU 1.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2D0U MPTB01
Universal Main Processing & Transmissio n unit with 4 E1s and 2 FE/ GE ports, UMPTb2
UMPTb2, universal main processing and transmission board
In a coMPT multimod e base station or a hybridMPT base station configure d with one BBU: 1
l The UMPTb2 board achieves synchronization with a GPS clock. For a new SRAN or LTE TDD site that needs to be synchronized with a GPS clock, a UMPTb2 board is preferentially delivered.
l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. l Provides four E1s/T1s. l Provides one CI port for BBU interconnectio n. l Provides the GPS clock port.
l For a new GSM only (eGBTS) or UMTS only site that needs to be synchronized with a GPS clock, a USCU board is preferentially delivered. In addition, a UMPTb2 board can be delivered.
In a coMPT multimod e base station or a hybridMPT base station configure d with two BBUs: 2 In a separateMPT base station: l One BBU: 2 l BBU interco nnecti on: 2
GM5D0U BRIB00
Universal BaseBand Radio Interface Board (6 CPRI interface, UBRIb)
Universal baseband radio interface unit (UBRIb)
In a separateMPT base station: 1
A UBRIb board must be configured in the following scenarios:
Provides six CPRI ports.
In a coMPT base station: 2
l RFUs and RRUs are configured, which include RRUs or RFUs in GSM mode.
l More than six CPRI ports are required by GSM.
l A UBRIb needs to be configured to provide CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT where co-MPT is applied. l Provides CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DU BBPD100
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d1
The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd1) provides six CPRI ports.
In GSM mode, when the GTMUb board is used as the main control board, a maximum of five baseband processing boards can be configure d; when the UMPT board is used as the main control board, a maximum of six baseband processing boards can be configure d.
From SRAN9.0 onwards, the UBBPd board is recommended for UMTS only or LTE only mode. The UBBPd board supports single mode or multiple modes sharing the same baseband processing board.
WD2DU BBPD200
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d2
The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd2) provides six CPRI ports.
WD2DU BBPD300
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d3
The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd3) provides six CPRI ports.
WD2DU BBPD400
WD2DU BBPD500
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d4
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d5
The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd4) provides six CPRI ports. The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd5) provides six CPRI ports.
In UMTS or LTE mode, a maximum of six baseband processing boards can be configure d.
The UBBPd board can be used together with the WBBP or LBBP board. In capacity expansion scenarios, it is recommended that the existing baseband processing boards be fully configured and the UBBPd board be added to provide the remaining capacity. In GBSS16.0, the UBBP board must be configured for the GSM single mode in the following scenarios: l VAMOS FR, VAMOS II, 4-way receive diversity, antenna frequency hopping, or MICC is enabled. l The AAU3902 supports the GSM mode. UMTS single mode: l From RAN16.0 onwards, the UBBP board is recommended for the UMTS single mode. LTE single mode: l In eRAN6.0, the UBBPd3 and UBBPd4 boards apply to the LTE single mode. l In eRAN7.0, the UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6 boards apply to the LTE single mode. l The specifications of UBBPd4 through UBBPd6 in LTE only mode for different combinations of cells are as follows: – The UBBPd4 does not support the mixed combination of 2T2R and 2T4R or 4T4R. – The UBBPd5 supports a maximum of six 2T2R cells or supports a maximum of three 2T2R or 4T4R cells. – The UBBPd6 supports the combinations of any two of 2T2R, 2T4R, 4T4R with a maximum of 3 cells of either mode. – The UBBPd6 configured with 2T2R supports a maximum of six cells.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
WD2DU BBPD600
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d6
The universal baseband processing board (UBBPd6) provides six CPRI ports.
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
– The UBBPd6 configured with either 2T4R or 4T4R supports a maximum of six cells. Multimode and co-BBP scenarios: l In a GU dual-mode base station, the UBBPd1, UBBPd2, UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, or UBBPd6 board must be configured. l In a GL dual-mode base station, the UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, or UBBPd6 board must be configured. l In a UL dual-mode base station, the UBBPd6 board must be configured. l In a GUL triple-mode base station, the UBBPd6 board must be configured.
In SRAN6.0, three modes can be deployed on two BBUs. For example, GSM and UMTS are deployed on one BBU and LTE mode is deployed on the other BBU, or GSM and LTE are deployed on one BBU and UMTS mode is deployed on the other BBU. The two BBUs cannot share transmission resources or clock signals. Configurations of LTE mode in GU+L mode are the same as those of LTE only mode. In GL+U mode, UMTS configurations are the same as the configurations in UMTS only mode. In SRAN7.0, two BBUs can be interconnected to support three modes, such as GU+L(G) and GL+U(G). In addition, transmission resources and clock signals can be shared between two interconnected BBUs. From SRAN7.0 onwards, the UMPT board is introduced to support the mainstream solution of co-transmission and the UTRPc board is used for the alternative solution of co-transmission. In RAN14.0, the UTRPa board is introduced (used only for UMTS) to replace the UTRP3 and UTRP4 boards, which will enter the EOM phase. In SRAN8.0, co-MPT is introduced. In co-MPT scenarios, co-transmission is recommended. The following table lists the principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU. Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
NOTE
For details about the specifications of each board, see the following contents in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description: Product Specifications > Technical Specifications of the BBU3900. For details about the transmission specifications, see Transmission Port.
Table 4-22 Principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2D00 USCU00
Universal Satellite Clock Unit
USCUb11, clock board used for LTE, without a satellite card
1
This board needs to be configured for the LTE mode when any of the following conditions is met: l This board is required when a BITS reference clock source is used for the LTE mode. l This board is required when the LTE mode is not configured with a main control board that has a builtin GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA function. l This board is required when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or RGPS clock is used for the LTE mode.
WD2D0U SCU300
Universal Synchroniz ation Clock Unit Supporting GPS and BITS
USCUb14, clock board with a built-in ublox GPS satellite card
1
This board is optional and can be configured from SRAN7.0, GBSS14.0, or RAN14.0 onwards. l This board is required when GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used for the GSM or UMTS mode. l This board is required when a BITS reference clock source is used for the LTE mode. l This board is required when the LTE mode is not configured with a main control board that has a builtin GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA function. l This board is required when the UMTS mode requires the OTDOA function. l In GU/GL/UL dual-mode base station, this board is required when GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used for GSM or UMTS, or when BITS clock synchronization is used for LTE. l This board is required in a GU/GL/UL dual-mode base station where the Common Clock feature is activated and GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used. l This board is required in either a single- or multimode base station when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or RGPS clock is used for the LTE mode.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2D00 UCIU00
Universal Cascading Interface Unit
UCIU for BBU interconne ction. It provides one port for connecting to the root BBU and five ports for connecting to the leaf BBUs.
1
For a separate-MPT triple-mode base station, BBU 0 needs to be configured with the UCIU if the two BBUs are interconnected by connecting the UCIU in one BBU and the UMPT in the other BBU.
Transmissi on extension board for GSM (UTRPb4)
1
This board is required when five to eight E1s/T1s need to be provided for GSM.
4
This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main control and transmission board in UMTS mode support ATM transmission and more than four E1s/T1s over ATM ports are required.
4
This board is required when the E1 ports on the main control and transmission board in UMTS mode support IP transmission and more than four E1s over IP are required.
GM5DUT RPB400
GSM TDM over E1/T1 Interface Unit
In GU dual mode, the UCIU board is required when a cabinet used by a 3900 series base station and a cabinet used by a 3012 series base station are installed side by side. In this case, the GTMUb board is mandatory and the UCIU board cannot be used for BBU interconnection.
Provides eight E1s/ T1s over TDM QWMD0U TRP300
Iub ATM Interface Unit (8 E1s)
UTRP3, UMTS transmissio n extension board Supporting eight E1s over ATM
QWMP0U TRP400
Iub IP Interface Unit (8 E1s)
UTRP4, UMTS transmissio n extension board Supporting eight E1s over IP
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0U TRP900
Iub IP Interface Unit (4 FE/ GE Electrical ports)
UTRP9, UMTS transmissio n extension board
4
This board is required when two or more FE electrical ports or any GE electrical port is used by UMTS.
Iub IP Interface Unit (2 FE/ GE Optical ports)
UTRP2, UMTS transmissio n extension board
QWMP0U TRP200
Each board provides four FE/GE electrical ports, and the number of the boards to be configured is determined by the required number of FE/GE electrical ports.
Provides four FE/GE electrical ports. 4
This board is required when two or more FE optical ports or any GE optical port is used by UMTS. In SRAN7.0 or RAN14.0, the UTRPc is configured by default.
Provides two FE/GE optical ports. QWMD0U TRP600
QWMD0U TRPA00
Iub ATM Interface Unit (1Unchann elized STM-1)
UTRP6, UMTS transmissio n extension board
Universal Transmissi on Resource Processing Unit (8E1/ T1)
UTRPa: UMTS transmissio n extension board. It provides eight ATM or IP over E1 ports.
4
This board is required when unchannelized STM-1 transmission is used by UMTS.
4
l This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main processing and transmission board in UMTS mode support ATM or IP transmission and more than four E1/T1 ports are required.
Provides one unchanneli zed STM-1 port
l Each board provides eight E1/T1 ports, and the number of the boards to be configured is determined by the required number of E1/T1 ports. l The ATM transmission and IP transmission cannot be used together. l The delivered UTRPa board supports the plug-andplay function in RAN14.0 and RAN14.1, and the delivered board cannot be customized. From RAN15.0 onwards, this board is supported by using software.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMD0U TRPC00
Universal Transmissi on Resource Processing Unit (4 Electrical FE/GE ports & 2 Optical FE/ GE ports)
Transmissi on extension board for WCDMA (UTRPc)
1
Optional. This board is introduced in SRAN7.0, GBSS14.0, RAN14.0, and eRAN3.0. The GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes can share one UTRPc board. From SRAN7.0 onwards, the UTRPc board is recommended for increasing FE/GE ports in all modes. When the GTMUa board is used, the UTRPc board cannot be used for transmission capacity expansion.
l Works in GSM, UMTS, or LTE mode.
l This board is required when a base station that uses triple-mode co-transmission is not configured with a UMPT, or is configured with a UMPT but requires expansion of the transmission capability. l This board is required when IPSec needs to be supported for GSM.
l Provide s four FE/GE electric al ports.
l This board is required when IPSec is used for UMTS and no UMPT is configured for UMTS. l This board is required when GE ports are required by GSM.
l Provide s two FE/GE optical ports. QCUBBB ULIG01
WD2P00U ELP00
WD2P0UF LPB00
Lighting Arrester Box
SLPU: surge protection box for transmissio n
1
Universal E1/T1 Lighting Protection Unit
UELP: universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit
-
Universal FE/GE Lighting Protection Unit
UFLPb: universal FE/GE lightning protection unit
-
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
l Each surge protection box is configured with a maximum of four surge protection boards. l A BTS3900AL cabinet contains one surge protection box. One piece needs to be configured when more than four surge protection boards are required. l Every four E1 ports are configured with one package for surge protection. l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains two E1 surge protection packages. This board needs to be configured when more than two E1 surge protection packages are required. l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with one package for surge protection. l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE surge protection package. This board needs to be configured when more than one FE/GE surge protection package is required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2P0UF LPC00
Universal FE/GE Lighting Protection Unit
UFLPc: universal FE/GE lightning protection unit
-
l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with one package for surge protection. l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE surge protection package. This board needs to be configured when more than one FE/GE surge protection package is required.
4.2.3 CPRI Networking Configurations The following table lists the CPRI networking configuration principles. NOTE
The CPRI networking configuration principles apply to a BBU3900.
Table 4-23 CPRI networking configuration principles Applicatio n Scenario
Networking Topology
Configuration Principle
Multimode SDR RF modules in separateMPT scenarios
Dual-star
The dual-star topology is recommended.
CPRI MUX
l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and GTMUb must be configured in GU CPRI MUX mode. The WBBPf/ UBBPd_U must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and UMTS signals. The WBBPf/ UBBPd_U must be installed in slot 2 or 3. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and GTMUb must be configured in GL CPRI MUX mode. The LBBPd/ UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and LTE signals. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be installed in slot 2 or 3. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and WBBPf/UBBPd_U must be configured in UL CPRI MUX mode. The LBBPd/ UBBPd_L or WBBPf/UBBPd_U must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE signals. Baseband processing boards that connect to fiber optic cables must be installed in slot 2 or 3.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Applicatio n Scenario
Networking Topology
Configuration Principle
Multimode SDR RF modules in co-MPT scenarios
CPRI MUX
The CPRI MUX topology is recommended. l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and UBRIb must be configured in GU CPRI MUX mode. The UBRIb must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and UMTS signals. The WBBPf/UBBPd_U must be installed in slot 2 or 3. The UBRIb must be installed in slot 0 or 1. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and UBRIb must be configured in GL CPRI MUX mode. The UBRIb must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and LTE signals. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be installed in slot 2 or 3. The UBRIb must be installed in slot 1. l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and LBBPd/UBBPd_L must be configured in UL CPRI MUX mode. The WBBPf/ UBBPd_U or LBBPd/UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE signals. Baseband processing boards that connect to fiber optic cables must be installed in slot 2 or 3.
Load sharing mode (for transition of existing sites)
l In the GU SDR load-sharing networking topology, the WBBPa/WBBPb/WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd_U and UBRI/UBRIb are configured. Both the GSM and UMTS baseband processing boards are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables. l In the GL SDR load-sharing networking topology, the LBBPc/LBBPd/UBBPd_L and UBRI/UBRIb are configured. Both the GSM and LTE baseband processing boards are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables. l In the UL SDR load-sharing networking topology, the WBBPa/WBBPb/WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd_U and LBBPc/LBBPd/UBBPd_L are configured. Both the UMTS and LTE baseband processing boards are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables.
4.3 RF Module Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules in a 3900 series base station. RFU and RRU ConfigurationRF Module Configurations 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station The type of RF modules to be used is determined by the frequency band. Each sector is configured with at least one RF module. The number of RF modules to be configured depends on the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.The following table lists the relationships between sectors and RF modules. For details about the frequency bands, number of sectors and carriers, and output power supported by each type of RF module, see technical specifications of RRUs and RFUs.RF module configurationsConfiguration ScenarioRF Module ConfigurationTransmit diversity2x2 Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
MIMOMIMO PrimeTwo TX channels are required for one sector:Two 1T modulesa are configured for one sector.One 2Tb or 4T module is configured for one sector.DL 4x2 MIMODL 4x4 MIMOFour TX channels are required for one sector:Two 2T modules are configured for one sector.One 4T module is configured for one sector. 1T modules cannot be used in this configuration scenario. UL 4-way DiversityUL 2x4 multi-user MIMO (MUMIMO)Four RX channels are required for one sector:Two 2R modules are configured for one sector.One 4R module is configured for one sector.a: In versions earlier than SRAN6.0, when two 1T RF modules are configured to support MIMO, the two RF modules must be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports. From SRAN6.0 onwards, it is recommended that the two RF modules be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports.b: In UMTS mode, two 2T RF modules in one sector support UL 4-way diversity but do not support carrier or power expansion. If RFUs and RRUs are used in the same base station, they cannot operate in the same frequency band.The application scenarios supported by RF modules vary according to the working mode of the RF modules, as shown in the following table.RF module configuration restrictionsModeRestrictionGSMThe DRFUs support UL 4-way diversity.From GBSS16.0/SRAN9.0, the UBBPd is introduced to process GSM baseband signals and support UL 4-way diversity.The DRFU, RRU3004, and 2T RF modules support the transmit diversity.When 4-way receive diversity is used, two DRFUs must be configured.When PBT or transmit diversity is used, each DRFU or RRU3004 supports only one TRX. Each cell served by the GSM DRFU or RRU3004 supports a maximum of two TRXs. When transmit diversity is used, the maximum number of carriers supported by each GSM RF module with two transmit channels decreases by half.When transmit diversity is used, the DRFU and RRU3004 do not support PBT. When UL 4-way diversity is used, the DRFU does not support TMA. When 4-way diversity is used, each cell supports a maximum of two TRXs.In an eGBTS, the RF modules do not support transmit diversity.UMTSRFUs support transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity.RRUs support DL transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity.LTEThe following configuration scenarios are supported: 2x2 MIMO, UL 4-way diversity, DL 4x2 MIMO, UL 2x4 MU-MIMO, and DL 4x4 MIMO. When DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO is used, two cascaded 2T RF modules or one 4T RF module is required. 1T RF modules do not support DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO.RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 900 MHz. RFUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. RFU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M9EMRFU05 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUe for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM MRFUe working at the 900 M EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x125 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE (supported only in multimode base stations), GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU03 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM This module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. MRFUd working at the 900 M EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM This module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. MRFUd working at the 900 M PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU07 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU05 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, LTE, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9PMRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM This module will no longer be sold. MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU06 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5M9EMRFU13 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900MHz EGSM Enhanced MRFUd working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU06 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5M9PMRFU13 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM Enhanced MRFUd working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9PGRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9PGRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz PGSM This module will no longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9EGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz EGSM This module will no longer be sold. Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9PGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9PGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz PGSM Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EGRFU04 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9EGRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz EGSM Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EDRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) DRFU 900 MHz EGSM DRFU working with 35 MHz bandwidth at the 900 MHz EGSM band UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9PDRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) DRFU 900 MHz PGSM DRFU working with 25 MHz bandwidth at the 900 MHz PGSM band UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. RRUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration. RRU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M9P392900 RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3929 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E392931 RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3929 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E392800 RRU3928 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3928 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9PDRRU00 RRU3004 900 MHz PGSM RRU3004 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9EDRRU00 RRU3004 900 MHz EGSM RRU3004 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9PGRRU04 RRU3008 900 MHz PGSM RRU3008 V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9EGRRU06 RRU3008 900 MHz EGSM RRU3008 V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9PMRRU04 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3908 V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9EMRRU03 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
RRU3908 V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9P392600 RRU3926 for Multi-mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3926 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E392600 RRU3926 for Multi-mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3926 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9P393600 RRU3936 for Multi-mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3936, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E393600 RRU3936 for Multi-mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3936, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9P393800 RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3938, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E393800 RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3938, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1800 MHz.RFUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M18MRFU32 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU32 (used for the BTS3900AL)MRFUe for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x125 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU05 (used for the BTS3900, Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU05 (used for the BTS3900AL)MRFUd for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzThis module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. Multimode RF modules working at the 1800 MHz full bandThe module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU07 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5MP18MRFU15 (used for the BTS3900AL)MRFUd for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzEnhanced MRFUd working at the 1800 MHz band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU03 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 1800 MHz AThis module will no longer be sold. MRFU working at segment A of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1770MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1875 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU04 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 1800 MHz BThis module will no longer be sold. MRFU working at segment B of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1725 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1820 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18WD5M18MRFU06 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU06 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18GM5M18GRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)GM5P18GRFU03 (used for the BTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 M AThis module will no longer be sold. Multi-carrier RFU working at segment A of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1770 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1875 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.GM5M18GRFU04 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)GM5P18GRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 M BThis module will no longer be sold. Multi-carrier RFU working at segment B of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1725 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1820 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18GM5M18GRFU05 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P18GRFU05 (used for the BTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 MMulti-carrier RFU working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18GM5M18DRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)DRFU 1800 MDRFU working at 1800 MHz:Supporting the full 1800 MHz bandUL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.RRUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M18392931RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18393900RRU3939 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzRRU3939, blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18392800RRU3928 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.GM6M18DRRU00RRU3004 1800 MHzRRU3004 working at the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18GRRU00RRU3008 1800 MHz ARRU3008 V1 working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1850 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18GRRU01RRU3008 1800 MHz BRRU3008 V1 working at the higher 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1740 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1835 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18MRRU01RRU for Multi-Mode 1800 MHz ARRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1850 MHzIt can work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode. The UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18MRRU02RRU for Multi-Mode 1800 MHz BRRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1740 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1835 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode. The UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.WD5M18392600RRU3926 Multi-Mode for 1800 MHzRRU3926 working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18393600RRU3936 Multi-Mode for 1800 MHzRRU3936, multimode blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18393800RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzRRU3938 working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The number of packages to be configured is determined Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 850 MHz. RFUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. RFU configuration Model Counter Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M85MRFU00 (for BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L) WD5P85MRFU00 (for BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 850MHz MRFU V2 working at the 850 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 824 MHz to 846.5 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 891.5 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. QWMMWRFU8500 (for BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L) QWMPWRFU8500 (for BTS3900AL) RF Unit for UMTS 850 MHz (80 W) WRFU working at segment A of the 850 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 824 MHz to 835 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 880 MHz It can work in UMTS mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. RRUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration. RRU configuration Model Counter Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5MJRUA850A RRU3936 MultiMode for 850MHz RRU3936, multimode blade RRU working at the 850 MHz full band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869MHz to 894MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For the specifications, see .For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M85394200 RRU3942 for Multi-Mode 850 MHz RRU3942 working at 850 MHz: The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. It supports four carriers and four antennas. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. QWEMRRU5A300 RRU for UMTS 850 MHz (40 W) RRU3801E working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 834 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 879 MHz It can work in UMTS mode. It supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. QWEMRRU50200 RRU for UMTS 850MHz (60 W) RRU3804 working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W. It can work in UMTS mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M85MRRU02 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 850MHz RRU3908 V2, multimode RF module working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M85GRRU00 RRU3008 850MHz RRU3008 V1 working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1900 MHz. RFUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. RFU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M19MRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P19MRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit for multi-mode 1900 MHz A MRFU V1 working at segment A of the 1900 M band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M19MRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P19MRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit for multi-mode 1900 MHz B MRFU V1 working at segment B of the 1900 M band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 GM5M19GRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P19GRFU00 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU 1900 MHz A Multi-carrier RF module working at segment A of the 1900 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M19GRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P19GRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU 1900 MHz B Multi-carrier RF module working at segment B of the 1900 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 RRUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration. RRU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle GM6M19GRRU00 RRU3008 1900 MHz A RRU3008 V1 working at the lower 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M19GRRU01 RRU3008 1900 MHz B RRU3008 V1 working at the higher 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M19MRRU01 RRU for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz A RRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the lower 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. WD5M19MRRU02 RRU for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz B RRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the higher 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. QWEMRRU20300 RRU for WCDMA 1900 MHz (40 W) RRU3801E working at 1900 MHz: UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W. It can work in UMTS mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. QWEMRRU20200 RRU for WCDMA 1900 MHz (60 W) RRU3804 working at 1900 MHz: UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It supports a maximum of four carriers and its maximum output power is 60 W. It can work in UMTS mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M19394200 RRU3942 for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz RRU3942 working at 1900 MHz: The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. It supports a maximum of two sectors in 1T2R mode. UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, GL, or UL mode. It supports four carriers and four antennas. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5MJRUA820A RRU3936 Multi-Mode for 1900 MHz RRU3936, multimode blade RRU working at the 1900 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, GL, or UL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For the specifications, see .For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 2100 MHz.RFUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleQWMMWRFUA100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFUA100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUa for WCDMA 2100MHz (1x100 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x100 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU8101 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU2100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUe for WCDMA 2100MHz (2x80 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUd for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS or LTE mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) QWMPWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUd for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU8102 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU1101 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RF module working at the 2100 MHz frequency band (enhanced module of the WRFU whose output power is 80 W):The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU4100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU4100 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (40 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x40 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU8100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) QWMPWRFU8100 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzBTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.RRUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M21382400RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100MHz (60W)RRU3824, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382401RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)Enhanced RRU3824, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382600RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RRU3826, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382601RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)Enhanced RRU3826, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383200RRU3832 for Multi-Mode AWSRRU3832, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.The RRU3832 supports two receive channels in RAN12.0 and RAN13.0 and supports four carriers in RAN12.0.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383900RRU3839 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RRU3839, blade RRU working at the 2100 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383800RRU3838 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3838, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS or LTE mode.The RRU3838 only supports four carriers in RAN12.0.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382900RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RRU3829 working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.The RRU3829 only supports four carriers in RAN12.0.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.It supports a maximum of six UMTS carriers and its total output power is 2x60 W.WD5M21MRRU00RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3828 working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.The RRU3828 only supports four carriers in RAN12.0.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU10300RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (40 W)RRU3801E working at 2100 MHz, which has entered the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W.It can work in UMTS mode.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU10200RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)RRU3804 working at 2100 MHz, which has entered the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W.It can work in UMTS mode.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU10700RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RRU3806 working at 2100 MHz, which has entered the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 80 W.It can work in UMTS mode.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU10800RRU for WCDMA/LTE 2100 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3808 working at 2100 MHz:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS or LTE mode.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382601RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)Enhanced RRU3826, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.It supports a maximum of four UMTS carriers and its total output power is 80 W.WD5M21382401RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)Enhanced RRU3824, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 7 (2600 MHz frequency band).RFUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RFU configurations.RFU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M26LRFU0C (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU0C (applying to the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M C (2x40W)LRFU working at segment C of the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2520 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2640 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
RFUs.WD5M26LRFU0E (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU0E (applying to the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M E (2x40W)LRFU working at segment E of the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2550 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2670 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.WD5M26LRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M D (2x40W)LRFU working at segment D of the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2510 MHz to 2560 MHz; DL: 2630 MHz to 2680 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.RRUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RRU configurations.RRU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M26324000RRU3240 for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W,2T4R)RRU3240 working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26LRRU0CRRU for LTE 2600M C (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment C of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2500 MHz to 2520 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2640 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26LRRU0DRRU for LTE 2600M D (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment D of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2510 MHz to 2560 MHz; DL: 2630 MHz to 2680 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26LRRU0ERRU for LTE 2600M E (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment E of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2550 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2670 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26LRRU68RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W)RRU3268, blade RRU working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:Its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26326000RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W,2T4R)RRU3260, blade RRU working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26326200RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x60W,2T4R)RRU3262 working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900:18 (when the BBU is installed in a rack)12 (when the BBU is installed in the APM30H)For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS).RFUs Working at Band 4 (AWS)The following table lists the RFU configuration.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleQCYMAWSRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) QCYPAWSRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL)CRFUd for LTE AWS (2x60 W)RF module working at the AWS band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.RRUs Working at Band 4 (AWS)The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5MAW384100RRU for LTE AWS (4T4R, 2x60W/4x30W)RRU3841 working at the AWS band:It works in 4T4R mode and provides maximum output power of 2x60 W or 4x30 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU40200RRU for WCDMA AWS (60 W)RRU3804 working at the AWS band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W.It can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU40800RRU for WCDMA/LTE AWS (2x40 W) RRU3808 working at the AWS band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383200RRU3832 for AWS (2x60 W)RRU3832, blade RRU working at the AWS bandThe module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL SDR mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 12 (700 MHz frequency band).RRUs Working at Band 12 (700 MHz Frequency Band) The following table lists RRU configurations.RRU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU00RRU for LTE 700MHz (2x40W)RRU3203 working at band 12 (700 MHz frequency band):The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 698 MHz to 716 MHz; DL: 728 MHz to 746 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 13 (700 MHz frequency band).RRUs Working at Band 13 (700 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RRU configurations.RRU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU01RRU for LTE 700MHz (2x40W)RRU3201 working at band 13 (700 MHz frequency band):The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 776 MHz to 787 MHz; DL: 746 MHz to 757 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 800 MHz.RFUs Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M08LRFU0E (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P08LRFU0E (used for the BTS3900AL)LRFU for LTE 800 M (2x60 W)LRFUe working at 800 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 832 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 821 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.RRUs Working at Band 20 Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
(800 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5MD8LRRU0ARRU for LTE 800 MHz A (2x40 W)RRU3220 working at segment A of the 800 MHz band:UL: 832 MHz to 847 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 806 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5MD8LRRU0BRRU for LTE 800 MHz B (2x40 W) RRU3220 working at segment B of the 800 MHz band:UL: 842 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 801 MHz to 821 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.WD5MD8LRRU00RRU for LTE 800 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3222 working at the 800 MHz frequency band: UL: 832 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 821 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.WD5M08LRRU68RRU for LTE 800 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3268, blade RRU working at the 800 MHz full band:The maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 832 MHz to 847 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 806 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS).Configuration of RRUs Working at Band 28 (APT700)The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU02RRU for LTE APT700 (2T2R, 2x40 W)RRU3268 working at the APT700 frequency band: It works in 2T2R mode and provides maximum output power of 2x40 W.UL: 703 MHz to 743 MHzDL: 758 MHz to 798 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M07LRRU03RRU for LTE APT700 (2T2R, 2x40 W)RRU3268 working at the APT700 frequency band: It works in 2T2R mode and provides maximum output power of 2x40 W.UL: 718 MHz to 748 MHzDL: 773 MHz to 803 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF modules working at Band 28 (700 MHz APT)
4.3.1 AAU Configuration This section describes the AAU configuration principles.
AAU3910 Configuration This section describes the AAU3910 configuration principles.
RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 2 (1800 MHz).
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-45 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD7M18MAA U00
AAU3910 1800MHz (2T2R, 2x63 dBm), 1710 to 1880 MHz (UL), 1920 to 2170 MHZ/2500 to 2690 (DL)
1.8 A (2T2R)+2.1/2.6 P:
6
Each sector is configured with an AAU.
l An RU3938 is used, which is in 2T2R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 1710 to 1785 MHz, DL: 1805 to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3938, see technical specifications of the RRU3938.
l It can provide a 4port broadband antenna of 2100 MHz/2600 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs.
RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2100 MHz).
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-46 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD7M21WAA U00
AAU3910 2100 MHz (2T4R, 2x65 dBm), 1920 MHz to 2170MHz (UL), 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz/2500 MHz to 2690 MHZ (DL)
2.1 A (2T4R)+1.8/2.6 P:
6
Each sector is configured with an AAU.
l An RU3832 is used, which is in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x60 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz, DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
For carrier power specifications of the RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3832.
l It can work in UMTS mode. l It can provide a 4port broadband antenna of 1800 MHz/2600 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs.
RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2600 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2600 MHz).
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-47 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2600 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD7M26LAA U00
AAU3910 2600 MHz (2T4R, 2x63 dBm), 2500 MHz to 2690MHz (UL), 1710 MHz to 2170MHZ (DL)
2.6 A (2T4R)+PCS/ 1.8/2.1/AWS P:
6
Each sector is configured with an AAU.
l An RU3260 is used, which is in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3260, see technical specifications of the RRU3260.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz, DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. l It can provide a 4port broadband antenna of PCS/1800 MHz/2100 MHz/ AWS for external RRUs and RFUs. WD7M26LAA U01
AAU3910 2600 MHz (2T2R, 2x63 dBm), 2500 MHz to 2690MHz (UL), 1710 MHz to 2170MHZ (DL)
2.6 A (2T2R)+PCS/ 1.8/2.1/AWS P: l An RU3268 is used, which is in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz, DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz
6
Each sector is configured with an AAU. For carrier power specifications of the RU3268, see technical specifications of the RRU3268.
l It can work in LTE mode. l It can provide a 4port broadband antenna of PCS/1800 MHz/2100 MHz/ AWS for external RRUs and RFUs.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS). Table 4-48 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS) Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD7MAWSA AU00
AAU3910 AWS (2T4R, 2x65dBm), 1710 - 1770 MHz/2110 2170 MHz (UL), 1850 1990 MHz (DL)
AWS A(2T4R) +PCS P:
6
Each sector is configured with an AAU.
l An RU3832 is used, which is in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x60 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3832.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz, DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz l It can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL mode. l It can provide a 4port antenna of PCS for external RRUs or RFUs.
RF modules working at mixed frequency bands RUs working at 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, and 2600 MHz can form 2 A configurations (highfrequency module in the upper slot and low-frequency module in the lower slot), as listed in the following table.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-49 Configuration principles for RF modules working at mixed frequency bands Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD7MWMJA AU00
AAU3910 2100 MHz+1800 MHz (2T4R, 2x65dBm, 2T2R, 2x63dBm), 1920 MHz to 2170 MHz (UL), 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz/2500 MHz to 2690 MHz (DL)
2.1 A (2T4R) + 1.8 A (2T2R)
6
Each sector is configured with an AAU.
An RU3938 is used as a 1.8 A RF module: l It works in 2T2R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3938 and RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3938 and RRU3832.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz, DL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. An RU3832 is used as a 2.1 A RF module: l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz, DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD7MWLJAA U00
AAU3910 2600 MHz+2100 MHz (2T4R, 2x63 dBm, 2T4R, 2x65 dBm), 2500 MHz to 2690 MHz (UL), 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz (DL)
2.6 A (2T4R) + 2.1 A (2T4R)
6
Each sector is configured with an AAU.
An RU3832 is used as a 2.1 A RF module: l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3832 and RU3260, see technical specifications of the RRU3832 and RRU3260.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz, DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode. An RU3260 is used as the 2.6 A RF module. l It works in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz, DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD7MLMJAA U00
AAU3910 2600 MHz+1800 MHz (2T4R, 2x63 dBm, 2T2R, 2x63 dBm), 2500 MHz to 2690 MHz (UL), 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz (DL)
2.6 A (2T4R) + 1.8 A (2T2R)
6
Each sector is configured with an AAU.
An RU3938 is used as a 1.8 A RF module: l It works in 2T2R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3938 and RU3260, see technical specifications of the RRU3938 and RRU3260.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz, DL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. An RU3260 is used as the 2.6 A RF module. l It works in 2T4R mode and provides a maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz, DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
AAU3902 Configuration This section describes configuration principles and typical configurations of an AAU3902.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
AAU3902 Configuration Principles The AAU3902 configuration principles are as follows: l
Each sector needs to be configured with an AAU3902. The number of RF modules is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l
The AAU3902 is an antenna with horizontal beamwidth of 65°, and therefore does not apply to an omni-directional site.
l
In sector splitting scenarios, the 4RXD mode (1T4R/2T4R/4T4R) is not supported. Therefore, the configuration of six sectors is not supported.
l
In non-sector-splitting scenarios: – One AAU3902 supports a sector with horizontal beamwidth of 65°. – An RU44-2.1Ga supports a maximum of eight 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R or 2T4R carriers.
l
In sector splitting scenarios: – If a sector is split vertically, an AAU3902 supports two sectors, each with a horizontal beamwidth of 65 degrees, – and an RU44-2.1Ga supports a maximum of four 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R carriers. It does not support 1T4R and 2T4R carriers.
l
An AAU3902 with one active unit can be converted to support two active units. For example, – an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P configuration to support the 2100 A+1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration, – or a 2600 MHz RU44 can be added to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration. NOTE
a: In 4RX mode, the WBBPb and WBBPd only support small specifications, and they do not support CPRI MUX. Therefore, the WBBPf is recommended for an RU44 of 2.1 GHz in 4RX mode.
Typical configurations of an AAU3902 The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902. Table 4-50 Typical configurations of an AAU3902
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Typical Configurations
MU02
RU44-2. 1G
RU44-1. 8G
PU 22
CU0 2
Supporting Version
2100 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P
1
1
0
1
1
SRAN8.0
2100 A+ 1800 A+ (790 to 960) P+ (1710 to 2690) P
1
1
1
1
0
SRAN9.0
1800 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P
1
0
1
1
0
SRAN9.0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
The typical configuration of an AAU3902 is 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P. Its package contains an RU44 of 2100 MHz. It can connect to a high-frequency RRU/RFU and a low-frequency RRU/RFU. The following table lists the configurations. Table 4-51 Principles for configuring an AAU3902 BOM Code
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantit y
Configuration Principle
02310TJ D
WD7MR44 M0200
2100 A +(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P
AAU3902 RU44-2100 MHz (2x63 dBm), 790 MHz to 960 MHz, 1710 MHz to 2690 MHz
6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. A package consists of an AU02V, an RU44-2.1G, an MU02, a PU22, and a CU.
Typical AAU3902 Conversion An AAU3902 with one active unit can be converted to support two active units. For example, an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration, or a 2600 MHz RU44can be added to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration. The following figure shows the conversion. The following figure shows the conversion.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Figure 4-1 AAU3902 conversion
4.3.2 Power Module This section describes configuration principles for the power modules used by 3900 series base stations.
BTS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-52 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900 Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B00 000
DC power distribution unit
A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. It cannot provide power for highpower RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, and RRU3839. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A +3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B00 000
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-11 B). It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports, among which six ports use big toolless female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
TD1MDCD U12B0
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). This module is used in DC cabinets and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
1
l Optional.
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
1
W0ACPSU0 0
PSU Module (AC/DC), 30A
l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.B. l In AC power supply scenarios, the original power supply system contains two PSUs. When more than two PSUs are required, one or more PSU packages need to be configured. l Each package contains a PSU.
WPSU50A01
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
PSU Module (AC/DC), 50 A
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.C. l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 2900 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet.
86
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2MR485 0G00
PSU module (AC/DC)
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
3
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.D.
Power module, used for converting +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power.
2
W0DCPSU0 0
PSU Module (DC/DC)
l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l It is optionally configured in Ver.B cabinets supplied with +24 V DC power. l In +24 V DC input scenarios, the power equipment houses two PSUs by default, and this module needs to be configured when more than two PSUs are required. A maximum of two PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l Each package contains one PSU.
WD2M000P EU03
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
-48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
87
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00PE IUD2
Power and Environmen t interface Unit(-48V)
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910.
2
l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
BTS3900L The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-53 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B00 000
DC power distribution unit
A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. It cannot provide power for highpower RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, and RRU3839. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A +3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B00 000
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-11B ). It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports, among which six ports use big toolless female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
TD1MDCD U12B0
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12B ). It provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
89
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2MR485 0G00
PSU module (AC/DC)
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
3
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.D.
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
WD2M000P EU03
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
-48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit
l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
90
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00PE IUD2
Power and Environmen t interface Unit(-48V)
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.It applies only to the BBU3910.
2
l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
BTS3900A The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-54 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B00 000
DC power distribution unit
A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. It cannot provide power for highpower RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, and RRU3839. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A +3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B00 000
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-11 B). It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports, among which six ports use big toolless female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
TD1MDCD U12B0
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). It provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
92
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
W0ACPSU0 0
PSU Module (AC/DC), 30 A
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
A maxim um of one piece can be configu red.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.B.
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
A maxim um of one piece can be configu red.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.C.
WPSU50A01
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
PSU Module (AC/DC), 50 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet. l A PSU provides a power supply of 1600 W. The actual configuration quantity depends on the total power consumption of the equipment. One additional PSU is required at sites where a diesel generator is used.
l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet. l A PSU provides a power supply of 2900 W. The actual quantity to be configured depends on the total power consumption of the equipment. One additional PSU is required at sites where a diesel generator is used.
93
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2MR485 0G00
PSU module (AC/DC)
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
A maxim um of three pieces can be configu red.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.D.
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
l Optional.
WD2M000P EU03
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
-48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l A PSU provides a power supply of 3000 W. The actual quantity to be configured depends on the total power consumption of the equipment. Each AC cabinet is configured with at least three PSUs (including the two PSUs in the original power system) at a site where a diesel generator is used.
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
94
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00PE IUD2
Power and Environmen t interface Unit(-48V)
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.It applies only to the BBU3910.
2
l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
BTS3900AL The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-55 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2P000PE U00
Power and Environmen t interface Unit (-48 V)
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
l Optional.
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910.
2
WD2P00PE UD00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Power and Environmen t interface Unit (-48 V)
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
96
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2MR485 0G00
PSU Module (AC/DC), 50 A
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
A maxim um of five pieces can be configu red.
l Optional components in the AC cabinet l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l In AC power supply scenarios, the original power supply system contains two PSUs, and a maximum of five PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l Each AC cabinet is configured with at least three PSUs (including the two PSUs in the original power system) at a site where a diesel generator is used.
DCDU12BP AC00
DCDU12BP DC00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
DC Power Distribution Unit (AC Cabinet)
DC Power Distribution Unit (DC Cabinet)
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). This module is used in an AC cabinet and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
2
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). It is used in DC cabinets and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
2
l Optional. l When a BTS3900AL AC cabinet is configured with DC RRUs, a DCDU-12B is required for every six DC RRUs. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l When a BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured with DC RRUs, a DCDU-12B is required for every six DC RRUs. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
97
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
DBS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900. Table 4-56 Principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900 Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B00 000
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-03 B)
3
l Optional. l The DCDU-03B can be used if the site is not configured with RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, or RRU3839. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A +3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU-03B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B00 000
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-11 B). It provides ten 25 A DC power outputs. Each DCDU supports a maximum of six groups of power cables for DC RRUs.
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l The DCDU-11B can be used if the site is configured with RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, or RRU3839. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports, among which six ports use big toolless female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l Each DCDU-11B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
98
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
TD1MDCD U12B0
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12 B). Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
3
l Optional. l Each DCDU-12B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
WD5PMPW 80000
AC/DC RRU power module
AC/DC RRU power module
-
WD5PACDC PM00
AC/DC RRU power module
AC/DC power module for a blade RRU
-
l Optional. l When an AC RRU consists of an RRU3824/RRU3826/ RRU3929/RRU3926/ RRU3936/RRU3838/ RRU3832/RRU3260/ RRU3268/RRU3938/ RRU3939 and an AC/DC module, this module must be quoted. Each AC RRU is configured with one of this module. l WD5PMPW80000 is replaced by WD5PACDCPM00.
WD2M000P EU03
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
-48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Optional. l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
99
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00PE IUD2
Power and Environmen t interface Unit (-48 V)
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910.
2
l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
BTS3900C The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-57 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD2P000PE U01
-48V Power and Environmen t interface Unit
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
1
l Optional.
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910.
1
WD2P00PE UD01
Power and Environmen t interface Unit (-48 V)
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU. l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l If a second UPEU, which occupies the same slot as the UEIU, is configured, the UEIU does not need to be configured in the BBU.
4.3.3 RET Module Configurations The following table lists the configurations of an RET module.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-58 Configurations of an RET module External Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
GM5M00GAT M00
Antenna and TMA Control Unit
RET antenna and TMA control module
2
This module is configured when DRFUs have been configured for GSM mode and a TMA or RET antenna is in use. When DRFUs are configured at a site and the TMA function is required, the GATM must be configured. Each GATM supplies power to six BiasTees. When DRFUs are configured at a site and the RET antenna is required, the GATM must be configured. Each GATM supplies power to three BiasTees.
GSM board
NOTE
In GSM mode, a common TMA cannot be used with an RET antenna, because the overcurrent of RET antenna adjustment will mistakenly cause a TMA alarm. GBSS12.0 supports a smart TMA which can be used with an RET antenna.
4.3.4 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the installation and site auxiliary materials.
Installation Auxiliary Materials This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials used for installing 3900 series base stations.
Transmission Cables/Packages The following table lists transmission cables and transmission packages for 3900series base stations.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-59 Installation auxiliary materials for 3900series base stations Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0004E100
Trunk Cable (75 ohm, 4 E1, 10 m)
-
l It needs to be configured when 75-ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is required. l One piece is configured for every four E1s.
QWMP0004E101
Trunk Cable (120 ohm, 4 E1, 10 m)
-
l It needs to be configured when 120-ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is required. l One piece is configured for every four E1s.
QWMP0000FE00
Ethernet Cable
-
l It needs to be configured when FE/GE electrical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every FE/GE.
LTIP000FBR00
Optical Fiber
-
l It needs to be configured when FE/GE optical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every FE/GE (only configured for Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets).
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0000FE02
Optical Fiber (FE/ STM-1)
-
l It needs to be configured when FE/ STM-1optical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every FE/STM-1 (only configured for Ver.D cabinets).
QWMP0000GE00
Optical Fiber(GE)
-
l It needs to be configured when GE optical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every GE (only configured for Ver.D cabinets).
Jumper Packages The following table lists jumper packages for 3900series base stations. Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP000JMP00
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RFU
-
l Each antenna is configured with one package when the base station uses RFUs. l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1).
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP000JMP02
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU
-
l Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package of the jumpers, which are used in common areas. l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1).
QWMP000JMP03
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU
-
l Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package of the jumpers, which are used in cold areas. l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1).
NOTE
(1) When 4-way receive diversity is used, the number of antennas to be configured is twice of that used in other scenarios.
Installation Packages for BBU Interconnection The following table lists installation packages for BBU interconnection of 3900series base stations.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5PUCIUIM00
UCIU Interconnecting Materials (Internal Cabinet)
1
Optional for the BTS3900L/ BTS3900AL. This package is required when BBUs are interconnected using UCIUs.
WD5PUCIUIM01
UCIU Interconnecting Materials (Internal Cabinet)
1
Optional for the BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ DBS3900. This package is required when BBUs are interconnected using UCIUs.
QWECUMPTIC02
UMPT Interconnection Cable, 2.0 m
1
Optional. This package is required for BBU interconnection by using the UMPTs. This package is used when two BBUs are installed in the same cabinet.
QWECUMPTIC05
UMPT Interconnection Cable, 5.0 m
1
Optional. This package is required for BBU interconnection by using the UMPTs. This package is used when the BBUs are installed in different cabinets.
RRU Virtual Installation Packages The following table lists the RRU virtual installation packages.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMPRRUINS01
RRU Installation Materials
-
QWMPRRUINS04
RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode)
-
l Optional. Different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables. l It is used for the following RRUs: RRU3004, RRU3008, RU3801E, RRU3804, RRU3806, RRU3808, RRU3201, RRU3203, RRU3220, and RRU3222. l Each RRU is configured with one package, which includes the RRU power cable, RRU fiber optical cable, and CPRI optical module.
QWMPRRUINS02
RRU Installation Materials, B
-
l Optional. Different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables. l These packages are required for the RRU3908/ RRU3928/ RRU3929/ RRU3828/ RRU3829/ RRU3926
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
QWMPRRUINS05
RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode)
-
RRU Installation Materials
-
QWMPRRUINS03
Configuration Principle providing a 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI port. l Each RRU is configured with one package, which includes the RRU power cable, RRU fiber optical cable, and CPRI optical module.
l Optional. A maximum CPRI data rate of 4.9 Gbit/s is supported. Different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables. l Each RRU3240/ RRU3942/ RRU3841 is configured with one package. l Each RRU other than the preceding is configured with
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
QWMPRRUINS06
RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode)
-
Configuration Principle one package when the RRU uses a 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI data rate.
RRU Power Cable Installation Package The following table lists the RRU power cable installation packages.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QW7PRRUCAP01
DBS3900, RRU Cable Package (≤ 50 m)
1
l Optional. Each DC RRU3936/ RRU3824/ RRU3826/ RRU3838/ RRU3832/ RRU3268/ RRU3260/ RRU3938/ RRU3939/ RRU3839 is configured with one package, which includes DC RRU power cables and PGND cables. l This package applies to the BTS3900/ BTS3900L/ BTS3900A/ DBS3900.
QW7PRRUCAP00
RRU Cable Package (≤ 100 m)
-
l Optional. Each RRU is configured with one package. l This package applies to the BTS3900AL.
QW7PAAUCAP01
RU Cable Package for AAU (≤ 100 m)
-
Optional. Each RU is configured with one package, which includes the DC RU power cable and ground cable.
RRU CPRI Installation Material Package The CPRI optical transmission material packages apply to an RRU3936/RRU3824/RRU3826/ RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3268/RRU3260/RRU3938/RRU3939/RRU3839 and RU3260/ RU3268/RU3832.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
l
The 2.5 Gbit/s or 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI installation material package is optionally configured according to the application scenario and port rate of an RRU/RU.
l
The multimode or single-mode material package is configured according to the type of the CPRI fiber optic cable.
The following table lists the RRU CPRI installation material packages. Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5P25CPRI02
DBS3900, CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2.5 Gbit/ s)
-
WD5P25CPRI01
BTS3900AL, CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2.5 Gbit/ s) (Single Mode)
-
l Optional. 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI optical transmission material package for RRUs. l Each RRU CPRI port is configured with one package when the CPRI port uses a 2.5 Gbit/s data rate. This package applies to a BTS3900/ BTS3900L/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900AL/ DBS3900.
WD5P49CPRI02
DBS3900, CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9 Gbit/ s)
-
WD5P49CPRI01
BTS3900AL, CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9 Gbit/ s) (Single Mode)
-
l Optional. 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI optical transmission material package for RRUs. l Each RRU CPRI port is configured with one package when the CPRI port uses a 4.9 Gbit/s data rate. This package applies to a BTS3900/ BTS3900L/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900AL/ DBS3900.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
AAU3902 Auxiliary Installation Materials The following table lists the AAU3902 auxiliary installation materials. Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
QW7PAAUCAP00
AAU Power Cable Package (≤ 100 m)
-
One package is configured for each AAU3902. The quoted items include the AAU3902 power cable and ground cable.
WD5P49CPRI02
DBS3900, CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9 Gbit/s)
-
One package is configured for each AAU3902 that uses multimode optical modules. Each package includes one fiber optic cable and two optical modules, which support a maximum rate of 4.9 Gbit/s.
WD5P49CPRI01
BTS3900AL, CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9 Gbit/s) (Single Mode)
-
One package is configured for each AAU3902 that uses single-mode optical modules. Each package includes one fiber optic cable and two optical modules, which support a maximum rate of 4.9 Gbit/s.
Installation Materials for Lampsite The following table lists the auxiliary material packages for Lampsite installation. Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
LT1PCOTMDC00
CPRI Optical Transmission Materials(Singlemode, 9.8 Gbit/s)
-
l Each RHUB3908 is configured with one package when it is connected to the BBU or another RHUB3908. l This package includes two optical modules and one optical fiber cable.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWHENTCBIN00
Ethernet Cable (Indoor)
-
l Each single-mode pRRU3901 is configured with one package. l For UL dual-mode PRRU3901, one package is configured for each pRRU3901 when the LTE carrier bandwidth configured for the RRU does not exceed 10 MHz but two packages are configured when the LTE carrier bandwidth configured for the RRU exceeds 10 MHz. l The package includes the POE Ethernet cable and installation package. The longest Ethernet cable is 100 m.
Materials for a Base Station with an APM30 Ver.D Providing Power for 15 RRUs Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMPODMINS00
ODM Installation Materials
1
l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 configured with an APM30 Ver.D when the number of RRUs is greater than 12. l This package includes one ODM, one set of mount kit, and installation auxiliaries. l The maximum power configuration of 15 RRUs is as follows: 12RRUs (2x60 W)+3RRUs (2x40 W).
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMPOFDOFM00
OFD and Optical Fiber(Multi-mode)
1
l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 configured with an APM30 Ver.D when the number of optical fiber cables configured for RRUs is greater than 21. l This package includes one OFD and one piece of 12core multimode optical cable. l This package is configured when the multimode CPRI optical fiber cable is required.
QWMPOFDOFS00
OFD and Optical Fiber(Single mode)
1
l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 configured with an APM30 Ver.D when the number of optical fiber cables configured for RRUs is greater than 21. l This package includes one OFD and one piece of 12core multimode optical cable. l This package is configured when the multimode CPRI optical fiber cable is required.
Site Installation Material Package The following table lists the site installation packages.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-60 Installation Material Package for a Macro Base Station Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5P0INSMT00
Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver.B
1
l Optional. Site installation material package for the BTS3900 (Ver.B). l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0INSMT06
Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver.C
1
l Optional. Site installation material package for the BTS3900 (Ver.C). l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0INSMT20
Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver.D
2
l Optional. Site installation material package for the BTS3900 (Ver.D). l Each BTS3900 (Ver.D) site is configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0INSMT24
Installation Materials for BTS3900 (Ver.D, 220 V)
2
l Optional. Site installation material package for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet of 220 V AC. l Each BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet of 220 V AC must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0INSMT05
Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver.B
1
l Optional. Site installation material package for the BTS3900L (Ver.B). l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0INSMT07
Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver.C
1
l Optional. Site installation material package for the BTS3900L (Ver.C). l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0INSMT10
Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver.D
1
l Optional. Configured for the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0INSMT25
Installation Materials for BTS3900L (Ver.D, 220 V)
1
l Optional. Site installation material package for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet of 220 V AC. l Each BTS3900L (Ver.D) AC cabinet must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
WD5P0INSMT01
Installation Materials for BTS3900A
1
l Optional. Configured for the BTS3900A (Ver.C) cabinet. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0INSMT08
Installation Materials for BTS3900A Ver.C
1
l Optional. Configured for the BTS3900A (Ver.C) cabinet. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0INSMT22
Installation Materials for BTS3900A (Ver.D, -48VDC)
1
QWMP0INSMT23
Installation Materials for BTS3900A (Ver.D, 220 V/110 V AC)
1
WD5P0INSMT09
Installation Materials for BTS3900AL
1
l Optional. Configured for the BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinet. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials. l Optional. Configured for the BTS3900AL cabinet. l Each BTS3900AL site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0INSMT03
Installation Materials for DBS3900
1
Each site configured with RFUs and RRUs needs to be configured with one package, which includes the related cables and low-value installation auxiliary materials.
Table 4-61 Site Installation Material Package for a DBS3900 Cabinet Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5P0INSMT03
Installation Materials for DBS3900
1
A site where a distributed base station is deployed is configured with one package, which includes the auxiliary cables and low-value installation auxiliary materials.
QWMP0INSMT13
OMB Cabinet Installation Materials (Ver.C, DC)
1
Optional. OMB Ver. C DC cabinet installation material package. Each OMB Ver.C DC cabinet is configured with one package.
QWMP0INSMT09
OMB Cabinet Installation Materials (Ver.C, AC)
1
Optional. OMB Ver. C AC cabinet installation material package. Each OMB Ver.C AC cabinet is configured with one package.
Table 4-62 BTS3900C Installation Auxiliary
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0004E100
Trunk Cable (75 ohm, 4 E1, 10 m)
-
It needs to be configured when 75-ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is required. Four E1s are configured with one piece.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0004E101
Trunk Cable (120 ohm, 4 E1, 10 m)
-
It needs to be configured when 120-ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is required. Four E1s are configured with one piece.
QWMP0000FE00
Ethernet Cable
-
When the FE/GE electrical port is used, each FE/GE is configured with one piece.
QWMP0000FE02
Optical Fiber (FE/ STM-1)
-
One piece is configured for each FE/STM-1 optical port when the FE/STM-1 optical port is used. FE/STM-1 optical fiber cables work with only BTS3900C Ver.C cabinets.
QWMP0000GE00
Optical Fiber(GE)
-
One piece is configured for each GE optical port when the GE optical port is used. GE optical fiber cables work with only BTS3900C Ver.C cabinets.
QWMP000JMP02
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU
-
Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package of the jumpers, which are used in common areas. In the case of 4-way RX diversity or RRU working in back-up mode, the number of jumpers doubles.
QWMP000JMP03
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU
-
Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package of the jumpers, which are used in cold areas. In the case of 4-way RX diversity or RRU working in back-up mode, the number of jumpers doubles.
WD5P25CPRI10
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2.5 Gbit/s)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Multimode optical transmission material package for RRUs with 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI rate, which is optional. One package is configured for each 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI port.
121
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5P49CPRI10
CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9 Gbit/s)
-
Multimode optical transmission material package for RRUs with 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI rate, which is optional. One package is configured for each 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI port.
WD5PINSMTAC0
Installation Materials for BTS3900C AC Cabinet
1
Optional. Site installation material package for a BTS3900C AC cabinet. One package must be configured for each BTS3900C AC cabinet.
WD5PINSMTDC0
Installation Materials for BTS3900C DC Cabinet
1
Optional, site installation material package for a BTS3900C DC cabinet. One package must be configured for each BTS3900C DC cabinet.
Auxiliary Materials on the Site This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on the sites of 3900series base stations.
BTS3900 or BTS3900L The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials for a BTS3900 or BTS3900L site. Table 4-63 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900 or BTS3900L site
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DGPSSAF00
GPS Antenna
1
One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.
WD2DGPSSAF01
GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System
1
One package is configured when the required GPS feeder is longer than 50 m and is shorter than or equal to 100 m.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
GM1X00IDDF01
Embedded DDF Box (75 ohm, 8 E1)
-
l If the 75 ohm DDF needs to be provided by Huawei, it is recommended that each indoor site be configured with one piece. l Each package supports 8E1s.
GM1X00IDDF02
Embedded DDF Box (120 ohm, 8 E1)
-
l If the 120 ohm DDF needs to be provided by Huawei, it is recommended that each indoor site be configured with one piece. l Each package supports 8E1s.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
QW7PRRUCEP02
RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and is shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
QW7PRRUCEP03
RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and is shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
E000ICL00
Indoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
-
This package is configured for site deployment according to the actual requirement.
WDCDBOX01
Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
-
This package is configured for site deployment according to the actual requirement.
EFEDWID01
Thru-Wall Encapsuled Wiring Window
l This package is configured for site deployment according to the actual requirement. l A maximum of one package can be configured for each site.
E000IGU00
Grounding Unit
2
l Each indoor site is configured with one ground bar. When the antenna is provided by Huawei, each site is configured with two ground bars. l Optional. This package is configured according to the requirements for a new base station. One package is configured for each outdoor site by default.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
GM1E00IEMU01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
One piece is configured for an indoor site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs.
QW7MEMUKIT01
Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors)
1
l One piece is configured if the environment (such as the liquid level, smoke, door status, temperature, and humidity) of the equipment room needs to be monitored. l It can support 32 Boolean alarm inputs. l GM1E00IEMU0 1 is not required when this package is configured.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GM1X0DNSPE01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
WD2M00EEUM01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Optional, UKspecific. Configured for a site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
125
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER01
Anti-Interference Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849 MHz, TX: 869 to 894 MHz, 851 to 856 MHz, 856 to 860 MHz, 898.5 to 915 MHz, 0.9(824 to 846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (846.5 to 848 MHz), 1.9 dB(848 to 849 MHz), 0.9 dB(869 to 891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (891.5 to 894 MHz), 54 dB, double, DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850 MHz frequency.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
126
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER02
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER03
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz, 869 to 883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
AANTIFLTER04
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935 to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX:0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER05
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960MHz, 869 to 894 MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
ATMAKIT00
TMA(No AISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (TMA not included), GU
-
l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. An auxiliary installation material package must be configured for each antiinterference filter. l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally, this item must be manually removed from the quotation list.
BTS3900A or BTS3900AL The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials for a BTS3900A or BTS3900AL site. Table 4-64 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or BTS3900C site
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DGPSSAF00
GPS Antenna
1
One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.
WD2DGPSSAF01
GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System
1
One package is configured when the required GPS feeder is longer than 50 m and is shorter than or equal to 100 m.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QW7P00EDDF00
Embedded DDF Box (75 ohm, 8 E1)
1
Optional. One package is configured for a new outdoor macro base station.
E00EDDF02
Embedded DDF Box (120 ohm, 8 E1)
1
Optional. One package is configured for a new outdoor macro base station.
QW7PRRUCEP02
RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and is shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
QW7PRRUCEP03
RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and is shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
WDCDBOX01
Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
1
Optional. It is configured according to the requirements for a new distributed base station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
E000IGU00
Grounding Unit
1
Optional. This package is configured according to the requirements for a new base station. One package is configured for each outdoor site by default.
GM5X00SLPU00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (1 to 16 Boolean Alarm)
1
It is configured for an outdoor macro base station that needs to collect 1 to 16 Boolean alarm inputs.
WD2M00EEUM00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
GM1X0DNSPE00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
Optional. Configured in an outdoor macro base station when 17 to 32 Boolean alarms are required.
GM1X0DNSPE01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
WD2M00EEUM01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Optional, UKspecific. Configured for a site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
133
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2K000EIK01
Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (Width 600 mm)
-
Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (OAP600) for a cabinet used by the BTS3900A, which is optional. The OAP600 is configured in outdoor scenarios with rails. The distance between rails can be adjusted from 535 mm to 750 mm. By default, one OAP600 is configured for each RFC, either a stacked cabinet or a standalone RFC.
WD2K000EIK02
Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (Width 800 mm)
-
Optional. OAP800, used for installing a BTS3900AL cabinet on outdoor steel rails. l The OAP800's width ranges from 480 mm to 780 mm. Its depth ranges from 500 mm to 750 mm. l Each BTS3900AL is delivery with one OAP800 by default.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER01
Anti-Interference Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849 MHz, TX: 869 to 894 MHz, 851 to 856 MHz, 856 to 860 MHz, 898.5 to 915 MHz, 0.9(824 to 846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (846.5 to 848 MHz), 1.9 dB(848 to 849 MHz), 0.9 dB(869 to 891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (891.5 to 894 MHz), 54 dB, double, DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850MHz frequency.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
135
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER02
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER03
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz, 869 to 883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
AANTIFLTER04
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935 to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX:0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER05
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960MHz, 869 to 894 MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
ATMAKIT00
TMA(No AISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (TMA not included), GU
-
l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. An auxiliary installation material package must be configured for each antiinterference filter. l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally, this item must be manually removed from the quotation list.
DBS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900 site. Table 4-65 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900 site
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DGPSSAF00
GPS Antenna
1
One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.
WD2DGPSSAF01
GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System
1
One package is configured when the required GPS feeder is longer than 50 m and is shorter than or equal to 100 m.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QW7P00EDDF00
Embedded DDF Box (75 ohm, 8 E1)
1
Optional. One package is configured for each newly deployed distributed base station.
E00EDDF02
Embedded DDF Box (120 ohm, 8 E1)
1
Optional. One package is configured for each newly deployed distributed base station.
E000IGU00
Grounding Unit
2
l Each indoor site is configured with one ground bar. When the antenna is provided by Huawei, each site is configured with two ground bars. l Each site is configured with one or two pieces if needed.
QW7PRRUCEP02
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and is shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
141
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QW7PRRUCEP03
RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and is shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
E000ICL00
Indoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured as required if the BBU is installed indoors in a new distributed base station.
WDCDBOX01
Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
-
Optional. It is configured according to the requirements for a new distributed base station.
GM5X00SLPU00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (1 to 16 Boolean Alarm)
1
It is optionally configured for a distributed base station when the BBU is installed outdoors and there are 1 to 16 Boolean alarm inputs.
WD2M00EEUM00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
It is optionally configured when the BBU is installed outdoors in a distributed base station and 16 to 32 Boolean inputs need be monitored. It is also optional configured when 1 to 16 Boolean inputs need be monitored for a +24 V
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
GM1X0DNSPE00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
distributed base station.
QW7MEEMUKIT0
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors)
1
QW1XEMEUWS00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors)
1
The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
Optional. Configured when the BBU is installed indoors and the environment (such as the liquid level, smoke, door status, and temperature and humidity) in the equipment room needs to be monitored. It can support 32 Boolean alarm inputs. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GM1X0DNSPE01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
WD2M00EEUM01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Optional, UKspecific. Configured for a site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
143
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER01
Anti-Interference Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849 MHz, TX: 869 to 894 MHz, 851 to 856 MHz, 856 to 860 MHz, 898.5 to 915 MHz, 0.9(824 to 846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (846.5 to 848 MHz), 1.9 dB(848 to 849 MHz), 0.9 dB(869 to 891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (891.5 to 894 MHz), 54 dB, double, DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850MHz frequency.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
144
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER02
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER03
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz, 869 to 883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
AANTIFLTER04
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935 to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX:0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER05
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960MHz, 869 to 894 MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
ATMAKIT00
TMA(No AISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (TMA not included), GU
-
l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. An auxiliary installation material package must be configured for each antiinterference filter. l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally, this item must be manually removed from the quotation list.
BTS3900C The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C site. Table 4-66 Auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C site
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
E000IGU00
Grounding Unit
1
Optional. This package is configured according to the requirements for a new base station. One package is configured for each outdoor site by default.
WD2DGPSSAF00
GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System
1
One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DGPSSAF01
GPS Satellite Antenna/Feeder System
1
One package is configured when the required GPS feeder is longer than 50 m and is shorter than or equal to 100 m.
4.3.5 Hardware License Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for each type of base station.
Hardware License Configuration of GSM Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base stations. The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base stations. Table 4-67 Hardware license configuration for GSM base stations
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
External Model
License Package Descripti on
Function
Configuration Principle
GMMS0 DRFUT0 0
3900 series DRFU transceiver (per TRX)
License for the Each DRFU provides one TRX by default. One TRX of a DRFU license is configured for each excess TRX. in GSM mode It applies to DRFUs.
GMMS0 GRFUT0 0
3900 series GRFU transceiver (per TRX)
License for providing multiple TRXs for a GRFU
Each GRFU provides one TRX by default. One license is configured for each excess TRX.
WDMS MULTIT 00
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
License for the second GSM TRX of a multimode RF module
Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by default. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two GSM TRXs, the module needs to be configured with one license.
It applies to GRFUs.
It applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
License Package Descripti on
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS MULTIT 01
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
License for multiple GSM TRXs of a multimode RF module
When a multimode module is configured with more than two GSM TRXs, the number of licenses to be configured for the module is the total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module minus 2.
GMMS0 DRRUT0 0
3900 series RRU3004 transceiver (per TRX)
RRU3004 dual transceiver license
Each RRU3004 supports one TRX by default. An RRU3004 that supports two carriers requires a double-transceiver license.
GMMS0 GRRUT0 0
3900 series RRU3008 transceiver (per TRX)
RRU3008 multiTRX license
Each RRU3008 supports one TRX by default. The number of multi-TRX licenses is one less than the number of TRXs supported by an RRU3008.
WDMS MULTIT 00
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
License for the second GSM TRX of a multimode RF module
Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by default. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two GSM TRXs, the module needs to be configured with one license.
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
License for multiple GSM TRXs of a multimode RF module
WDMS MULTIT 01
This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.
It applies to multimode RRUs. This license is configured when a multimode module is configured with more than two GSM TRXs. The number of licenses to be configured for the module is the total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module minus 2. This license applies to multimode RRUs.
GMMSM C60HP00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License (per TRX)
Each TRX of a multi-carrier module supports 60 W transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 60 W and is smaller than 80 W. For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 60 W, the Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License is supported.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
External Model
License Package Descripti on
Function
Configuration Principle
GMMSM C80HP00
Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License (per TRX)
Each TRX of a multi-carrier module supports 80 W transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 80 W. This package does not contain the license package of Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX).
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Blade&AA U
License for the second GSM TRX of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU)
Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by default. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two GSM TRXs, the module needs to be configured with one license.
GSM Multiple Transceiver for MultiMode Blade&AA U
License for multiple GSM TRXs of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU)
This license is configured when a multimode module is configured with more than two GSM TRXs. The number of licenses to be configured for the module is two less than the total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module.
Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AA U (per TRX)
Each TRX of a multi-TRX module (AAU or blade RRU) supports 60 W transmit power.
WDMS MULTIT 03
WDMS MULTIT 02
GMMSM C60HP01
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 80 W, the Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License is supported.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU. One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 60 W and is smaller than 80 W. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
License Package Descripti on
Function
Configuration Principle
GMMSM C80HP01
Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License for Blade&AA U (per TRX)
Each TRX of a multi-TRX module (AAU or blade RRU) supports 80 W transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 80 W. This package does not contain the license package of Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX). For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 80 W, the Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License is supported. This license applies only to AAUs and blade RRUs.
Hardware License Configuration of UMTS Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base stations. The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base stations. Table 4-68 Hardware license configuration of UMTS base stations Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
QWMS00 0UCE01
UL CE License for 0 CEs to 64 CEs (per 16 CEs)
This license is configured for the UMTS mode. It is used for uplink CEs and quoted in a step-wise manner.
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
QWMS00 0UCE02
QWMS00 0UCE03
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
UL CE License for 64 CEs to 128 CEs (per 16 CEs) UL CE License for 128 CEs to 192 CEs (per 16 CEs)
l It is configured when less than or equal to 64 CEs are required. l Four licenses are configured when more than 64 CEs are required. Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured. It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs.
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured. It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
License Package Description
QWMS00 0UCE04
UL CE License for more than 192 CEs (per 16 CEs)
QWMS00 0DCE01
QWMS00 0DCE02
QWMS00 0DCE03
QWMS00 0DCE04
QWMS0H DPAC00
DL CE License for 0 CEs to 64 CEs (per 16 CEs)
DL CE License for 64 CEs to 128 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Function
Configuration Principle
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured. It is configured when more than 192 CEs are required. This license is configured for the UMTS mode. It is used for downlink CEs and quoted in a step-wise manner.
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured. l It is configured when less than or equal to 64 CEs are required. l Four licenses are configured when more than 64 CEs are required. Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured. It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs.
DL CE License for 128 CEs to 192 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
DL CE License for more than 192 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
HSDPA Code (per Code)
It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs.
It is configured when more than 192 CEs are required. HSDPA code resources
This is a mandatory HSDPA function item. This item must be configured based on the quantity of the HSDPA code resources required by the base station. Each package is one HSDPA code. The minimum configuration is five HSDPA codes. For a base station, the maximum number of HSDPA codes that can be configured equals the number of cells carried by the base station multiplied by 15. The number of HSDPA codes required by a base station must be a multiple of 5.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
QWMS00 0MCA00
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
Multi-carrier function for the UMTS mode
A license for one carrier is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the module has more than one carrier, one package needs to be configured for each excess carrier. This license applies to the WRFU, WRFUd, and RRU in UMTS mode.
QWMS00 00PA00
Power License (per 20 W)
License package for 20 W power
A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power.
WDMS00 0MCA00
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
License for the first carrier of the UMTS mode in a multimode RF module
The quotation of a multimode RF module does not include a license for UMTS carriers. Therefore, one license is configured for the first UMTS carrier of each module.
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
License for multiple UMTS carriers of a multimode RF module
The quotation of a multimode RF module does not include a license for UMTS carriers. Therefore, one license is configured for each of the second to fourth UMTS carriers of each module.
UMTS NodeB Signaling Capacity License (per 50 CNBAP/s)
UMTS signaling capacity license
Multi Carrier License for Blade&AAU (per Carrier)
Multi-carrier function for the UMTS mode of an AAU or blade RRU
WDMS00 0MCA01
QWMS00 UNSC00
QWMS00 0MCA01
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
This license applies to multimode RF modules.
This license applies to multimode RF modules. It is configured when the signaling capacity of a base station exceeds 350 CNBAP/s. Each license contains a signaling capacity of 50 CNBAP/s. This license is supported from SRAN7.0/ RAN14.0 onwards. A license for one carrier is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the module has more than one carrier, one package needs to be configured for each excess carrier. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
QWMS00 00PA01
Power License for Blade&AAU (per 20 W)
License package for 20 W power of an AAU or blade RRU
A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.
WDMS00 0MCA03
WDMS00 0MCA02
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Blade&AAU (per Carrier)
License for the first UMTS carrier of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU)
The license package for each UMTS carrier is not included in a multimode module, but configured for the first UMTS carrier of each multimode module. One license is required for each UMTS carrier.
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Blade&AAU (per Carrier)
License for multiple UMTS carriers of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU)
The license package for each UMTS carrier is not included in a multimode module. It is configured for the second to fourth carriers for each multimode module. One license is required for each UMTS carrier.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Hardware License Configuration of LTE Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base stations. The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base stations. Table 4-69 Hardware license configuration for LTE base stations
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
External Model
License Package Descriptio n
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S000 0PA00
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
Power license package for RF modules
A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
License Package Descriptio n
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S000 MCA00
LTE Multi Carrier (per Carrier)
Multi-carrier license package for RF modules
The quotation for each RF module includes one carrier by default. When more than one carrier is used by an RF module, one package is configured for every additional carrier. It applies to RF modules with multiple carriers.
LT1S005 MHZ00
Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz
Capacity Carrier Bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules
l When a cell uses less than or equal to 5 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.
LT1S010 MHZ00
Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz
Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules
l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.
LT1S015 MHZ00
LT1S020 MHZ00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz
Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules
l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz
Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules
When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
License Package Descriptio n
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S0AC TUS00
RRC connected User
License for the baseband processing capacity of RRC_connect ed users (per RRC_connect ed user)
This package is configured based on the network plan. Each cell is configured with the licenses for a minimum of 6 RRC_connected users, and the number of RRC_connected users increases with a step of 6. A maximum of 5400 RRC_connected users are allowed.
License for the throughput capacity of the baseband processing module (per Mbit/s)
This package is configured based on the network plan. Each cell is configured with a minimum of 5 Mbit/s, and the capacity increases with a step of 5 Mbit/s. The maximum capacity is 750 Mbit/s.
Resource Block (per RB)
Assume that N specifies the number of required packages per cell. The total number of packages equals N multiplied by the number of cells. N is determined by the cell bandwidth as follows:
LT1S0TH ROU00
LT1S000 0RB00
Throughput Capacity
Resource Block
For example, a S1/1/1 base station is configured with a minimum of 18 (equal to 3x6) RRC_connected users.
For example, a S1/1/1 base station is configured with a minimum of 15 Mbit/s (equal to 3 x 5 Mbit/s).
l 1.4 MHz: N is 6. l 3 MHz: N is 15. l 5 MHz: N is 25. l 10 MHz: N is 50. l 15 MHz: N is 75. l 20 MHz: N is 100. In multi-carrier scenarios, the number of required packages is calculated on a per-carrier basis. The total number of packages is the sum of the calculation results. This package applies only to the LBBPd.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
License Package Descriptio n
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S00B BTC00
BB Transmit Channel
BB Transmit Channel (per Channel)
This package is configured when the LBBPd2 requires more than two transmit channels. The quotation for an LBBPd2 includes two transmit channels per cell. When the number of transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is required for each transmit channel added. The number of required packages is calculated using the following formula: Number of packages required for one LBBPd2 = Number of sectors with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels - 2) x Number of carriers This license only applies to the LBBPc, LBBPd2, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
LT1S00B BRC00
BB Receive Channel
BB Receive Channel (per Channel)
This package is configured when the LBBPd2 requires more than two transmit channels. Each baseband board has been configured with two receive channels per cell. Therefore, one package is required for every receive channel added. The number of required packages is calculated using the following formula: Number of packages required for one LBBPd2 = Number of sectors with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels - 2) x Number of carriers This license only applies to the LBBPc, LBBPd2, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
LT1S00R FTC00
RF Transmit Channel
RF Transmit Channel(per Channel)
This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF receive channels. Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. Add this package for each extra RF transmit channel of an RF module. This package applies only to the RF modules with four transmit channels (4T RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels of a single RRU - 2)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
License Package Descriptio n
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S00R FRC00
RF Receive Channel
RF Receive Channel (per Channel)
This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF receive channels. Each RF module has two RF receive channels. Add this package for each extra RF receive channel on an RF module. This package applies only to the RF modules with four receive channels (4R RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels of a single RRU - 2)
LT1S000 0PA01
RF Output Power Blade&AA U (per 20 W)
Power license package for an AAU or blade RRU
A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
LT1S000 MCA01
LT1S005 MHZ01
LT1S010 MHZ01
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
RF multi carrier for blade&AA U (per carrier)
Multi-carrier license package for an AAU or blade RRU
The quotation for each RF module includes one carrier by default. When more than one carrier is used by an RF module, one package is configured for every additional carrier.
Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz for Blade&AA U
Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU
When a cell uses 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, or less than or equal to 5 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz for Blade&AA U
Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU
When a cell uses 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
License Package Descriptio n
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S015 MHZ01
Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz for Blade&AA U
Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU
When a cell uses 15 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz for Blade&AA U
Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU
When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
RF Transmit Channel for Blade&AA U
Blade&AAU RF Transmit Channel(per Channel)
This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF transmit channels.
LT1S020 MHZ01
LT1S00R FTC01
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. Add this package for each extra RF transmit channel of an RF module. This package applies only to the RF modules with four transmit channels (4T RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels of a single RRU - 2) This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
LT1S00R FRC01
RF Receive Channel for Blade&AA U
Blade&AAU RF Receive Channel (per Channel)
This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF transmit channels. Each RF module has two RF receive channels. When the number of RF receive channels exceeds 2, one package is required for each added receive channel. This package applies only to the RF modules with four receive channels (4R RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels of a single RRU - 2) This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
NOTE
In MIMO scenarios, the power of each module is the product of the number of MIMO channels and the output power of each channel. For example: l 2x2 MIMO (2x30 W): Each RRU requires 60 W power and is configured with two RF channels. l 2x2 MIMO (2x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels. l 4x2 MIMO (4x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels. The BBU3900 supports hybrid configuration of the LBBPc, LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring hardware licenses, co-MPT licenses, and co-BBP licenses for multimode base stations.
Hardware License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base stations. Table 4-70 Principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base stations External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS00 GUDM00
RF GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
Dual-mode license for GU RF modules
One package is configured for each sector served by a GU RF module.
WDMS00 GLDM00
RF GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
Dual-mode license for GL RF modules
One package is configured for each sector served by a GL RF module.
WDMS00 ULDM00
RF UMTS/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
Dual-mode license for UL RF modules
One package is configured for each sector served by a UL RF module.
WDMS00 GUDM01
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector)
GU dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU
In GU dual mode, one package is configured for each sector.
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector)
GL dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU
In GL dual mode, one package is configured for each sector.
WDMS00 GLDM01
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS00 ULDM01
UMTS/LTE Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector)
UL dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU
For a UL dual-mode base station, one package is configured for each sector. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Co-MPT License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the principles for configuring the co-MPT licenses for multimode base stations. Table 4-71 Co-MPT license configuration for multimode base stations Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS0 UMMG0 0
MPT Multi Mode license (GSM) (Per UMPT)
Co-MPT license for GSM
Configure this package based on the number of GSM base stations supported by each UMPT(1). Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license.
WDMS0 UMMU0 0
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS) (Per UMPT)
Co-MPT license for UMTS
Configure this package based on the number of UMTS base stations supported by each UMPT(1). Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license.
WDMS0 UMML00
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE FDD) (Per UMPT)
Co-MPT license for LTE
Configure this package based on the number of LTE base stations supported by each UMPT(1). Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license.
NOTE
(1) Each UMPT supports one mode by default. One license needs to be added for each additional mode. When multiple modes are configured for a UMPT, first quote a UMPT for the earliest mode and then add licenses for later modes. The GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes are arranged from the earliest to the latest as follows: GSM < UMTS < LTE
Co-BBP License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base stations. Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-72 Configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base stations
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS00UFMG00
UBBP First-Mode license (GSM) (per UBBP)
License for the first mode (GSM) of the UBBPa
One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses GSM as its first mode.
WDMS00UMMG00
UBBP Multi-Mode license (GSM) (per UBBP)
License for adding a new mode (GSM) of the UBBPa
One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which GSM is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode).
WDMS00UFMU00
UBBP First-Mode license (UMTS) (per UBBP)
License for the first mode (UMTS) of the UBBPa
One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses UMTS as its first mode.
WDMS00UMMU00
UBBP Multi-Mode license (UMTS (per UBBP)
License for adding a new mode (UMTS) of the UBBPa
One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which UMTS is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode).
WDMS0UFMLF00
UBBP First-Mode license (LTE FDD) (per UBBP)
License for the first mode (LTE FDD) of the UBBPa
One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses LTE FDD as its first mode.
WDMS0UMMLF00
UBBP Multi-Mode license (LTE FDD) (per UBBP)
License for adding a new mode (LTE FDD) of the UBBPa
One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which LTE FDD is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
(1) In newly deployed single-mode sites, the license for the first mode (UBBP First-Mode license) must be quoted. (2) In newly deployed multimode sites, if licenses for multiple modes are purchased together, the license for a higher mode can be purchased with the license for a lower mode for free. The modes are arranged from the lowest to the highest as follows: GSM > UMTS > LTE FDD > LTE TDD. (3) In mode transition scenarios such as single mode to single mode, single mode to multimode concurrency, and multimode concurrency with new mode added, the UBBP Multi-Mode license corresponding to the newly added mode must be purchased.
4.4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station 4.4.1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station In a Lampsite base station, main control units and base band processing units in a BBU vary depending on product versions. The following table lists mapping between the board and product version in a Lampsite base station. Table 4-73 Mapping between the board and product version in a Lampsite base station Product Version
SRAN 9.0
Board Type
LTE FDD
Main Control Unit
UMPTa, UMPTb, and LMPT
Baseband Processin g Unit
LBBPd and UBBPd
UMTS
UL Dual-Mode SeparateMPT
Co-MPT
UMPTa and UMPTb
UMPTa and UMPTb
UMPTb
WBBPd, WBBPf, and UBBPd
UMTS: WBBPf, WBBPd (providing only baseband resources), and UBBPd LTE: LBBPd and UBBPd
NOTE
LTE FDD mode is configured with the LMPT only in base station conversion scenarios. In a newly deployed base station, the UMPT is delivered and the LMPT is not recommended.
Restrictions on the BBU configurations in a Lampsite base station are as follows: l
A single BBU can support a maximum of 18 LTE RF cells.
l
A single BBU can support a maximum of 12 UMTS RF cells.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
l
In UL dual-mode scenarios, the WBBPd can only be used to provide UMTS baseband resources and cannot be used to provide CPRI optical ports.
l
When the UBBPd is used, UMTS and LTE modes cannot be deployed on the same baseband processing unit in a Lampsite base station and must be separately deployed on different baseband processing units.
l
In a macro+micro site, if the UBBPd is used as a multi-mode baseband processing unit in the macro base station, one UMTS baseband processing unit and one LTE baseband processing unit need to be configured in the Lampsite base station.
l
If a Lampsite base station is deployed with UL modes, the RHUB can only be connected to the CPRI port on the baseband processing unit in slot 2 or 3 of the BBU using a single fiber optic cable, and the BBU must use the CPRI MUX feature.
4.4.2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles The following figure shows the exterior of an RHUB3908. The following table lists the RHUB3908 configuration principles. Figure 4-2 Exterior of an RHUB3908
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-74 RHUB3908 configurations Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD6M39RHU B00
RHUB3908, WD6M1RBH2, pRRU pool and PoE support (2xCPRI SFP, 8xCPRI OVER PHY with PSE, PSU, Global)
CPRI transmission signal combination unit of the pRRU Supports RF signal division and combination of the pRRU cell and supports CPRI data compression and decompression of various modes.
24
A single BBU can be configured with a maximum of 24 RHUBs. The code applies to global markets except Japan. The RHUB of this code is not configured with power cables. Therefore, the RHUB needs to be delivered with AC power cables according to countries and areas.
The basic HUB3908 configuration principles are as follows: l
A single SRAN9.0 BBU supports a maximum of 24 RHUBs.
l
The RHUB and BBU (or the RHUB and RHUB) can be connected in the single-star or chain topology. The RHUB supports a maximum of four cascading levels.
l
The RHUB optical port supports a maximum rate of 9.8 Gbit/s and supports adaptive switching among 1.228 Gbit/s, 2.4576 Gbit/s, 4.9152 Gbit/s, 9.8304 Gbit/s.
l
The RHUB and pRRU are connected through the GE electrical port and support the singlechain topology and load sharing mode. Each RHUB can connect to a maximum of eight pRRUs.
l
The RHUB electrical port only supports the CPRI data rate of 1.228 Gbit/s.
The following table lists the carrier configuration principles of the SRAN9.0 RHUB.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-75 Carrier configuration principles of the SRAN9.0 RHUB Application Scenario
Carrier Configuration Principle of the SRAN9.0 RHUB
LTE FDD
l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four LTE carriers. l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four independent pRRU groups. Each pRRU group supports a maximum of two LTE carriers. l LTE supports combination of RF signals from cells connected through the RHUB. LTE supports combination of RF signals from a maximum of 16 pRRUs connected to four RHUBs on the same chain. l In LTE mode, a maximum of six RF cells configured on different baseband processing units can form one baseband cell. NOTE LTE does not support combination of baseband signals from RF cells configured on different baseband processing units.
UMTS
l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four UMTS carriers. l A single RHUB supports a maximum of two independent pRRU groups. Each pRRU group supports a maximum of two UMTS carriers. l UMTS supports combination of RF signals from RF cells connected through the RHUB. UMTS supports combination of RF signals from a maximum of 16 pRRUs connected to four RHUBs on the same chain. l In UMTS mode, a maximum of six RF cells configured on different baseband processing units can form one baseband cell. NOTE A single RHUB that is configured with one pRRU group supports a maximum of two carriers.
4.4.3 Basic pRRU Configurations The following table lists the pRRU configuration principles.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-76 pRRU configuration principles Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD5MP390110 0
pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU4, pRRU3901, UMTS MultiCarriers Remote Radio Unit (Band I: TX2110-2170 MHz/ RX1920-1980 MHz, PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, 1T2R, 1x200 mW)
Air interface specifications
96
(Optional) This module is used when a 2.1 GHz frequency band is configured for UMTS. The number of modules depends on site requirements.
pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU3, pRRU, LTE Single-mode Remote Radio Unit (Band III: TX1805-1860 MHz/ RX1710-1765 MHz, PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, 2T2R, 2x100 mW, with Installation Kit)
Air interface specifications
WD6M18RRU L00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
2.1 Gbit/s 1T2R UMTS TX power: 1x200 mW Carrier specifications:
RF modules supporting 2.1 GHz frequency band apply to global markets.
2 carriers (UMTS)
96
1.8 Gbit/s 2T2R LTE FDD TX power: 2x100 mW Carrier specifications: 1 carrier (LTE)
(Optional) This module is used when a 1.8 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE. The number of modules depends on site requirements. RF modules supporting 55 MHz of the 1.8 GHz frequency band apply to China.
LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD6M39PRRU 05
pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU6, pRRU, MultiMode Remote Radio Unit Band I (S1)+Band III (S2) (PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, with Installation Kit), (TX2110 to 2170 MHz/ RX1920 to 1980 MHz, 2T2R, 200 mW), (TX1805 to 1860 MHz/ RX1710 to 1765 MHz, 2T2R, 2x100 mW)
Air interface specifications
96
(Optional) This module is used when a 1.8 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE and a 2.1 GHz frequency band is configured for UMTS. The number of modules depends on site requirements.
1.8 GHz: 2T2R LTE FDD 2.1G 1T2R UMTS Transmit power:
RF modules supporting 55 MHz of the 1.8 GHz frequency band apply to China.
1.8 GHz: 2x100 mW 2.1 GHz: 1x200 mW
l In co-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 48 pRRUs are supported.
Carrier specifications: 1 carrier (LTE FDD)
l In separate-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 96 pRRUs are supported.
2 carriers (UMTS) LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz. WD6M39PRRU 00
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
pRRU3901, WD6M1PRUa, pRRU, LTE Single-mode Remote Radio Unit (Band III: TX1805-1880 MHz/ RX1710-1785 MHz, PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, 2T2R, 2x100 mW, with Installation Kit)
Air interface specifications
96
1.8 GHz: 2T2R LTE FDD TX power: 2x100 mW Carrier specifications: 1 carrier (LTE)
(Optional) This module is used when a 1.8 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE. The number of modules depends on site requirements. RF modules supporting 75 MHz of the 1.8 GHz frequency band apply to global markets.
LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD6M39PRRU 01
pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU8, pRRU, MultiMode Remote Radio Unit Band I (S1)+Band III (S2) (PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, with Installation Kit), (TX2110 to 2170 MHz/ RX1920 to 1980 MHz, 2T2R, 200 mW), (TX1805 to 1880 MHz/ RX1710 to 1785 MHz, 2T2R, 2x100 mW)
Air interface specifications
96
(Optional) This module is used when a 1.8 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE and a 2.1 GHz frequency band is configured for UMTS. The number of modules depends on site requirements.
1.8 GHz: 2T2R LTE FDD 2.1 GHz: 1T2R UMTS Transmit power: 1.8 GHz: 2x100 mW 2.1 GHz: 1x200 mW Carrier specifications: 1 carrier (LTE FDD) 2 carriers (UMTS) LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RF modules supporting 75 MHz of the 1.8 GHz frequency band apply to global markets. l In co-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 48 pRRUs are supported. l In separate-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 96 pRRUs are supported.
171
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD6M39PRRU 02
Function Module, pRRU3901, WD6M1PRU9, pRRU, MultiMode Remote Radio Unit Band I (S1)+Band I (S2) (PoE/12 V DC, 1.25 Gbit/s, with Installation Kit), (TX2110 to 2170 MHz/RX1920 to 1980 MHz, 2T2R, 200 mW), (TX2110 to 2170 MHz/RX1920 to 1980 MHz, 2T2R, 200 mW)
Air interface specifications
96
(Optional) This module is used when a 2.1 GHz frequency band is configured for LTE and a 2.1 GHz frequency band is configured for UMTS. The number of modules depends on site requirements.
2.1 GHz: 1T2R UMTS 2.1 GHz: 2T2R LTE FDD Transmit power: 1x200 mW (UMTS) 2x100 mW (LTE) Carrier specifications: 2 carriers (UMTS) 1 carrier (LTE FDD)
l In co-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 48 pRRUs are supported. l In separate-MPT scenarios, a maximum of 96 pRRUs are supported.
LTE supports a scalable bandwidth of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz.
The pRRU configuration principles are as follows: l
In newly deployed Lampsite networks, pRRUs cannot be split and must be sold integrally. Application for pRRU codes has been submitted for the frequency band combination supported by current versions.
l
Two pRRUs cannot be combined to implement MIMO.
l
The pRRU provides two CPRI ports, each supporting a 1.228 Gbit/s rate, to exchange data with the RHUB.
l
The pRRU and RHUB can be connected in the branch chain (single-link) topology or branch load sharing mode.
l
When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in the branch chain (single-link) topology, each RHUB supports a maximum of 8 pRRUs and a single BBU supports a maximum of 96 pRRUs.
l
When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in the single-chain topology, each RHUB supports the following configurations:
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
– 1. Two carriers for UO mode – 2. One carrier with a maximum bandwidth of 20 MHz for LO mode – 3. LTE carrier with a 20 MHz bandwidth (compression mode is 3:1) and a maximum of two UMTS carriers for UL dual-mode mode Connections of the branch chain (single-link) topology
l
When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in branch load sharing mode, each RHUB supports a maximum of 4 pRRUs and a single BBU supports a maximum of 48 pRRUs. When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in load sharing mode, each RHUB supports the following configurations: – 1. Two LTE carriers, each supporting a 20 MHz bandwidth – 2. LTE carrier, each supporting a 20 MHz bandwidth (compression mode is 2:1), and a maximum of two UMTS carriers for UL dual-mode mode Connections of the branch load sharing mode
l
The CPRI bandwidth of the pRRU and RHUB is less than or equal to 2.456 Gbit/s. Therefore, it is recommended that services be processed by two pRRUs if the CPRI bandwidth is greater than 2.456 Gbit/s.
4.5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion This section describes the typical configuration scenarios and capacity expansion scenarios of 3900 series base stations.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
4.5.1 Typical Configurations This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in various application scenarios.
GSM Mode This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in GSM mode and using RFUs or RRUs.
Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations Using RFUs Table 4-77 and Table 4-78 list the typical configurations of 3900 series macro base stations in GSM mode and using DRFUs and GRFUs, respectively. NOTE
DRFUs are not configured in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
Table 4-77 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using DRFUs
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Product Config uration
S1/1/1 (Witho ut a Combi ner)
S2/2/2 (Witho ut a Combi ner)
S3/3/3 (With a Combi ner)
S4/4/4 (With a Combi ner)
S4/4/4 (Witho ut a Combi ner)
S6/6/6 (With a Combi ner)
S8/8/8 (With a Combi ner)
BTS390 0 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS390 0A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS390 0L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DRFU
3
3
5
6
6
9
12
3900 Series DRFU Transcei ver (per TRX) License
0
3
4
6
6
9
12
Antenna
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-78 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using GRFUs Product Configur ation
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S6/6/6
S8/8/8
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900 A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900 L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900 AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GRFU
3
3
3
3
3
6
3900 Series GRFU Transceiv er (per TRX)
0
3
6
9
15
18
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations Using RRUs Table 4-79 and Table 4-80 list the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in GSM mode and using RRU3004 and RRU3008 modules, respectively.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-79 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using RRU3004 modules Product Config uration
S1/1/1 (Witho ut a Combi ner)
S2/2/2 (Witho ut a Combi ner)
S3/3/3 (With a Combi ner)
S4/4/4 (With a Combi ner)
S4/4/4 (Witho ut a Combi ner)
S6/6/6 (With a Combi ner)
S8/8/8 (With a Combi ner)
Cabinet (optional )
1
1
1
1
1
l APM 30H (Ver. B): 2
l APM 30H (Ver. B): 2
l APM 30H (Ver. D): 1
l APM 30H (Ver. D): 1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRU300 4
3
3
6
6
6
9
12
3900 Series RRU300 4 Transcei ver (per TRX)
0
3
4
6
6
9
12
Antenna
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
Table 4-80 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using RRU3008 modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Product Configur ation
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S6/6/6
S8/8/8
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3008
3
3
3
3
3
6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Product Configur ation
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S6/6/6
S8/8/8
3900 Series RRU3008 Transceiv er (per TRX)
0
3
6
9
15
18
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
UMTS Mode This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in UMTS mode and using RFUs or RRUs. NOTE
l In non-MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W). l In actual configurations, only one type of baseband board is selected.
Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations Using RFUs A 3900 series macro base station in UMTS mode can be configured with WRFUs with different power, for example, WRFU (80 W) and WRFUd (2x60 W). Table 4-81 and Table 4-82 list the typical configurations of the base stations using different RFUs. Table 4-81 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using WRFUs (80 W)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Product Configuration
S1/1/1 (NonMIM O)
S2/2/2 (NonMIM O)
S3/3/3 (NonMIM O)
S4/4/4 (NonMIM O)
S1/1/1 (MIM O)
S2/2/2 (MIM O)
S3/3/3 (MIM O)
S4/4/4 (MIM O)
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Product Configuration
S1/1/1 (NonMIM O)
S2/2/2 (NonMIM O)
S3/3/3 (NonMIM O)
S4/4/4 (NonMIM O)
S1/1/1 (MIM O)
S2/2/2 (MIM O)
S3/3/3 (MIM O)
S4/4/4 (MIM O)
WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Baseb and proces sing board
WBB Pd
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
WBB Pf3/4
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
WRFU (80 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
Power License (per 20W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Table 4-82 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using WRFUd (2x60 W) modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Product Config uration
S1/1/1 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S3/3/3 (NonMIMO)
S4/4/4 (NonMIMO)
S1/1/1 (MIMO )
S2/2/2 (MIMO )
S3/3/3 (MIMO )
BTS390 0 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS390 0A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS390 0L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS390 0AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Product Config uration
S1/1/1 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S3/3/3 (NonMIMO)
S4/4/4 (NonMIMO)
S1/1/1 (MIMO )
S2/2/2 (MIMO )
S3/3/3 (MIMO )
UMPTa 1/ UMPTb 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf3 /4
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
WRFUd (2x60 W)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
3
6
9
Power License (per 20W)
0
3
6
9
3
9
15
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations Using RRUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in UMTS mode and using RRU3806 or RRU3826 modules. Table 4-83 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 using RRU3806/RRU3826 modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Product Configuration
S1/1/1 (NonMIM O)
S2/2/2 (NonMIM O)
S3/3/3 (NonMIM O)
S4/4/4 (NonMIM O)
S1/1/1 (MIM O)
S2/2/2 (MIM O)
S3/3/3 (MIM O)
S4/4/4 (MIM O)
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Baseb and
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
WBB Pd
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Product Configuration
S1/1/1 (NonMIM O)
S2/2/2 (NonMIM O)
S3/3/3 (NonMIM O)
S4/4/4 (NonMIM O)
S1/1/1 (MIM O)
S2/2/2 (MIM O)
S3/3/3 (MIM O)
S4/4/4 (MIM O)
proces sing board
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
RRU3806 (80 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
Power License (per 20W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WBB Pf3/4
The following table lists the typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) base station in UMTS mode and using RRU3806 modules. Table 4-84 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) using RRU3806 modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Product Configuration
O1
O2
O3
O4
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
Baseba nd process ing board
WBBP d
1
1
1
1
WBBPf 3/4
1
1
1
1
RRU3806
1
1
1
1
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
1
2
3
Power License (per 20W)
0
1
2
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Product Configuration
O1
O2
O3
O4
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
Antenna
1
1
1
1
LTE Mode This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in LTE mode and using RFUs or RRUs. NOTE
l This table assumes that each channel provides 20 W power. l In actual configuration, only one type of baseband board or RF module is selected.
Typical Configurations of LTE Base Stations (with RFUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in LTE mode and using LRFUs. Table 4-85 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using LRFUs Product Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
DL 2x2 MIMO
S2/2/2 CoFrequency
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidt h
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
LMPT/ UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
Baseb and board
1
1
1
3
LBBPc
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Product Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO LBBPd
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidt h
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
2(LBBPd1)/
1 (LBBPd2)
1 (LBBPd2)
1(UBBPd4)
1(UBBPd5)
1 (UBBPd4)
1 (LBBPd1)
1 (LBBPd1)
1 (UBBPd3)
1(UBBPd3)
LRFU
3
3
3
6
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
6
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
6
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
0
3
Resource Block
150
300
300
150
300
BB Transmit Channel
0
0
0
6
6
BB Receive Channel
0
0
0
6
6
RF Transmit Channel
0
0
0
6
6
RF Receive Channel
0
0
0
6
6
LTE Multi Carrier (per Carrier)
0
0
3
0
0
Antenna
3
3
3
6
6
UBBP d
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
DL 2x2 MIMO
S2/2/2 CoFrequency
1 (LBBPd3) 2(UBBPd3)/
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
LTE Base Station Configurations (with RRUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in LTE mode and using the RRU3201. Table 4-86 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using the RRU3201 Product Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc
1
1
1
3
LBBP d
1
1
1
1
UBBP d
1(UBBPd3)
1(UBBPd3)
1(UBBPd4)
1(UBBPd4)
RRU3201
3
3
6
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
Resource block (required for the LBBPd2)
150
300
150
300
Baseban d board
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Product Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
BB transmit channel (required for the LBBPd2)
0
0
6
6
Antenna
3
3
6
6
GU Co-Module This section describes the typical configurations when GSM and UMTS are deployed on one SDR modules of a 3900 series base station. NOTE
The power of each WCDMA carrier is configured to 20 W.
Typical Configurations of GU Co-module Base Stations Using MRFUs Multimode RFUs can be configured in a 3900 series macro base station in the GU separate-MPT or GU co-MPT scenario. Table 4-87 and Table 4-88 list the typical configurations in these scenarios. Table 4-87 Typical configurations of a GU separate-MPT base station using MRFUs
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCD MA 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
BTS39 00 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
BTS39 00AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT / UMPT a1/ UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBP d/ WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MRFU/ MRFU e/ MRFU d
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM/ UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
WCD MA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WCD MA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
Power License (per 20W)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Antenn a
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Table 4-88 Typical configurations of a GU co-MPT base station using MRFUs
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCD MA 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
BTS39 00 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
MRFU/ MRFU e/ MRFU d
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM/ UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
WCD MA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCD MA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS )(per UMPT)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Antenn a
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Typical Configurations of GU Base Stations Using RRUs An RRU3908, RRU3926, or RRU3928 can be configured in a DBS3900 in the GU separateMPT or GU co-MPT scenario. Table 4-89 and Table 4-90 list the typical configurations in these scenarios. Table 4-89 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 in separate-MPT scenario using RRU3908 modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCD MA 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
Cabinet (option al)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT / UMPT a1/ UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBP d/ WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRU39 08/ RRU39 29/ RRU39 28
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM/ UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
WCD MA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WCD MA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Antenn a
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-90 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 in co-MPT scenario using RRU3929/ RRU3928 modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCD MA 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
Cabinet (option al)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRU39 29/ RRU39 28
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM/ UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
GSM Multipl e Transce iver for MultiMode Module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
WCD MA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WCD MA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS )
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
Antenn a
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
The RRU3929 can be configured in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet in the GU separate-MPT or GU co-MPT scenario. Table 4-91 and Table 4-92 list the typical configurations in these scenarios. Table 4-91 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) in separate-MPT scenario using RRU3929 modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
O4
WCDMA 900 MHz
O1
O1
O1
O1
O2
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd/ WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3929
1
1
1
1
1
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
1
1
1
1
1
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module
0
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
O4
GSM Multiple Transceiver for MultiMode Module
0
0
1
2
2
WCDMA 1 Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
1
1
1
1
WCDMA 0 Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
1
Power License (per 20W)
0
0
0
0
1
Antenna
1
1
1
1
1
Table 4-92 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT scenario using RRU3929 modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
O4
WCDMA 900 MHz
O1
O1
O1
O1
O2
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
O4
WBBPd/ WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3929
1
1
1
1
1
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
1
1
1
1
1
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module
1
1
1
1
1
GSM Multiple Transceiver for MultiMode Module
0
0
1
2
2
WCDMA 1 Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
1
1
1
1
WCDMA 0 Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
1
Power License (per 20W)
0
0
0
0
1
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS)
1
1
1
1
1
Antenna
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GU Co-BBU This section describes the typical configurations when GSM and UMTS are deployed on one BBU of a 3900 series base station. NOTE
l In UMTS non-MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In UMTS MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W). l In actual configurations, only one type of baseband processing board or RF module is selected.
Typical Configurations of a GU Co-BBU Base Station Using RFUs For a 3900 series base station in GU separate-MPT scenario, Table 4-93 lists the typical configurations when the WRFU (80 W) is used and Table 4-94 lists the typical configurations when the WRFUd (2x60 W) is used. Table 4-93 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using WRFUs (80 W)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCD MA 2100 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
BTS39 00 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
WMPT / UMPT a1/ UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBP d
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
WRFU (80 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
GRFU (900 MHz)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU (1800 MHz)
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
RF Output Power (per 20W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
3900 Series GRFU Transce iver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
0
3
6
12
Antenn a
6
6
9
9
6
6
9
9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-94 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using WRFUd (2x60 W) modules
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
WCDM A 2100 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
BTS390 0 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS390 0A cabinet
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
BTS390 0L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS390 0AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTa 1/ UMPTb 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
WRFUd (2x60 W)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU (900 MHz)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU (1800 MHz)
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20W)
0
3
6
9
3
9
15
3900 Series GRFU Transcei ver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
0
3
6
Antenna
6
6
9
9
6
6
9
Typical Configurations of a GU Co-BBU Base Station Using RRUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in the GU co-BBU mode. Table 4-95 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RRUs
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCD MA 2100 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
Cabinet (option al)
1
1
APM30 H (Ver.B) :2
APM30 H (Ver.B) :2
APM30 H (Ver.B) :2
APM30 H (Ver.B) :2
APM30 H (Ver.B) :2
APM30 H (Ver.B) :2
APM30 H (Ver.D) :1
APM30 H (Ver.D) :1
APM30 H (Ver.D) :1
APM30 H (Ver.D) :1
APM30 H (Ver.D) :1
APM30 H (Ver.D) :1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT / UMPT a1/ UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBP d
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
RRU38 06
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
RRU30 08 (900 MHz)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
RRU30 08 (1800 MHz)
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
Power License (per 20W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
3900 Series RRU30 08 Transce iver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
0
3
6
12
Antenn a
6
6
9
9
6
6
9
9
GL Co-Module This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and LTE modes co-exist in the RF modules of a 3900 series base station. NOTE
l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power. l The following configurations assume that each GSM carrier provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GL Co-Module Base Stations (with RFUs) Table 4-96 lists the typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station using RFUs. Table 4-97 lists the typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station using RFUs. Table 4-96 Typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station (with RFUs) GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00 cabinet Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
BTS39 00A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPT a2/ UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LBBPd 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MRFU d 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
GSM/ LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwi dth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
Carrier Bandwi dth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwi dth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwi dth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
GSM multipl e transcei ver for the 2nd TRX of multim ode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multipl e transcei ver for multim ode module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
Resour ce Block
150
300
150
300
150
300
150
300
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
BB Transm it Channe l
0
0
0
0
6
6
6
6
Antenn a
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Table 4-97 Typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station (with RFUs)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
BTS39 00 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LBBPd 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MRFU d 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
GSM/ LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwi dth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwi dth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwi dth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwi dth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
GSM multipl e transcei ver for the 2nd TRX of multim ode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multipl e transcei ver for multim ode module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
Resour ce Block
150
300
150
300
150
300
150
300
BB Transm it Channe l
0
0
0
0
6
6
6
6
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE) (Per UMPT)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Antenn a
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Typical configurations of a GL base station using RRUs The RRU3929 can be configured in the BTS3900C (Ver.C) that uses the GL separate-MPT or G*L co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 4-98 and Table 4-99. Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-98 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in separate-MPT mode (with the RRU3929)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 1800 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
LTE 1800 MHz
O1
O1
O1
O1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
UMPTa2
1
1
1
1
LBBPd2
1
1
1
1
RRU3929
1
1
1
1
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
1
1
1
1
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
1
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 1800 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
1
2
Resource Block
100
100
100
100
BB Transmit Channel
0
0
0
0
Antenna
1
1
1
1
Table 4-99 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT mode (with the RRU3929)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 1800 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
LTE 1800 MHz
O1
O1
O1
O1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
LBBPd1
1
1
1
1
RRU3929
1
1
1
1
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
1
1
1
1
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 1800 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
1
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
1
2
Resource Block
100
100
100
100
BB Transmit Channel
0
0
0
0
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE)
1
1
1
1
Antenna
1
1
1
1
GL Co-BBU This section describes the typical configurations when GSM and LTE are deployed on one BBU of a 3900 series base station. NOTE
The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations Using RFUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a 3900 series macro base station in the GL co-BBU separate-MPT scenario.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-100 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RFUs
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
NA
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidt h
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidt h
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidt h
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900 A cabinet
1
1
2
2
2
2
BTS3900 L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900 AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
LMPT/ UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc/ LBBPd1
1
1
1
1
1
3
GRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU 1800 MHz
0
0
3
3
3
3
LRFU
3
3
3
3
6
6
RF Output Power (per 20W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidt h0~5MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
Carrier Bandwidt h5~10MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidt h10~15MH z
0
3
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidt h15~20MH z
0
3
0
3
0
3
3900 Series GRFU Transceiv er (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
6
12
Antenna
6
6
9
9
9
9
Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations Using RRUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in the GL co-BBU separateMPT scenario. Table 4-101 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RRUs
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidt h
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidt h
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidt h
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
LMPT/ UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc/ LBBPd1
1
1
1
1
1
3
RRU3008 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
RRU3008 1800 MHz
0
0
3
3
3
3
RRU3201
3
3
3
3
6
6
RF Output Power (per 20W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidt h0~5MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidt h5~10MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidt h10~15MH z
0
3
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidt h15~20MH z
0
3
0
3
0
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
3900 Series RRU3008 Transceiv er (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
6
12
Antenna
6
6
9
9
9
9
GUL Triple-Mode This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station supporting the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes. NOTE
l In UMTS non-MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In UMTS MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W). l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RFUs Table 4-102, Table 4-103, and Table 4-104 list the typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode base station using RFUs. Table 4-102 Typical configurations of a GUL separate-MPT base station GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
UMTS 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
UMTS 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S3/3/3 (NonMIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
1
1
1
1
BTS3900 cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
BTS3900A cabinet
2
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
2
2
2
2
GTMU
1
1
1
1
WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LMPT/ UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc
1
1
1
1
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
GRFU 1800 MHz
0
3
3
3
WRFU 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
LRFU 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module
3
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module
0
0
0
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
Multiple Transceiver (Per TRX)
0
6
9
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20W)
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz
0
0
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz
0
0
3
3
Antenna
9
12
12
12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-103 Typical configurations of a base station in GU+L(G)/GL+U(G) mode
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
UMTS 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
UMTS 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S3/3/3 (NonMIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
2
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
2
2
2
2
GTMU
1
1
1
1
UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
UCIU
1
1
1
1
WBBPf
1
2
2
2
UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LBBPd2
2
2
2
2
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
MRFU 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
WRFU 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
LRFU 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module
6
6
6
6
GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module
3
3
6
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20W)
3
3
3
3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz
0
0
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz
0
0
6
6
Resource Block
300
300
600
600
Antenna
12
12
12
12
Table 4-104 Typical configurations of a base station in G*U*L mode GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
UMTS 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
UMTS 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S3/3/3 (NonMIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
1
1
1
1
BTS3900 cabinet
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
BTS3900A cabinet
2
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
2
2
2
2
WBBPf
1
2
2
3
LBBPd2
2
2
2
2
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
MRFU 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
WRFU 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
LRFU 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module
6
6
6
6
GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module
3
3
6
9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20W)
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz
0
0
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz
0
0
6
6
Resource Block
300
300
600
600
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS)(per UMPT)
1
1
1
1
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE)(per UMPT)
1
1
1
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
Antenna
12
12
12
12
Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RRUs Table 4-105 lists the typical configurations of a base station working in GU+L(G) mode and using RRUs. Table 4-106 lists the typical configurations of a base station working in G*U*L mode. Table 4-105 Typical configurations of a base station in GU+L(G) mode using RRUs GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
UMTS 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
UMTS 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S3/3/3 (NonMIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
APM30H (Ver.C): 2
APM30H (Ver.C): 2
APM30H (Ver.C): 2
APM30H (Ver.C): 2
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
BBU
2
2
2
2
GTMU
1
1
1
1
WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd/ WBBPf
1
2
2
3
UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc/ LBBPd1
1
1
1
1
Cabinet (optional)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
UCIU
1
1
1
1
RRU3908 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
RRU3929 1800 MHz
0
3
3
3
WRRU 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
LRRU 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module
3
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module
0
0
0
3
Multiple Transceiver (Per TRX)
0
6
9
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License
3
3
3
6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
RF Output Power (per 20W)
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz
0
0
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz
0
0
3
3
Antenna
9
12
12
12
Table 4-106 Typical configurations of a base station in G*U*L mode
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
UMTS 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
UMTS 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S2/2/2 (NonMIMO)
S3/3/3 (NonMIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
Cabinet (optional)
l APM30H (Ver.C): 2
l APM30H (Ver.C): 2
l APM30H (Ver.C): 2
l APM30H (Ver.C): 2
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
2
2
2
2
WBBPf
1
2
2
3
LBBPd2
2
2
2
2
RRU3929 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
RRU3929 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
RRU3829 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
RRU3201 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of Multi-Mode Module
6
6
6
6
GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module
3
3
6
9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20W)
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz
0
0
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz
0
0
6
6
Resource Block
300
300
600
600
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE)
1
1
1
1
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS)
1
1
1
1
Antenna
12
12
12
12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RFUs and RRUs The following table lists the typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode base station using RFUs and RRUs. Table 4-107 Typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode base station using RFUs and RRUs LTE 800 MHz
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
S1/1/1
N/A
S1/1/1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
UMTS 900 MHz
S1/1/1 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
UMTS 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2 (MIMO)
S3/3/3 (MIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
BBU
2
2
2
GTMU
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
WBBPd
2
3
4
LMPT/UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
LBBPc
2
1
2
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
GRFU 1800 MHz
3
3
3
WRFU 2100M
3
6
6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
LTE 800 MHz
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
S1/1/1
N/A
S1/1/1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
LRFU 2600 MHz
3
0
0
RRU 2600 MHz
0
3
3
RRU 800 MHz
3
0
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Module
3
3
3
GSM Multiple Transceiver for Multi-Mode Module
0
0
3
3900 Series GRFU Transceiver (per TRX)
6
9
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
3
3
Power License (per 20W)
3
6
15
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20W)
6
3
6
Carrier Bandwidth 0~5MHz
6
3
6
Carrier Bandwidth 5~10MHz
6
3
6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
LTE 800 MHz
S1/1/1
N/A
S1/1/1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Carrier Bandwidth 10~15MHz
3
3
6
Carrier Bandwidth 15~20MHz
3
3
6
Antenna
12
12
12
GU Co-BBP This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in GU co-BBP mode. The following table lists the typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and coBBP and configured with WRFUs of 80 W. Table 4-108 Typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and co-BBP and configured with WRFUs of 80 W
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 900 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCD MA 2100 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
BTS39 00L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS39 00A cabinet
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
BTS39 00 cabinet
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
BTS39 00AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPT b1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBBP d1
1
1
1
1-
1
1
1
1-
UBBP d2
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
1
WRFU of 80 W
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
MRFU 1800 MHz
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
MultiCarrier Licens e
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
3900 series GRFU transce iver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
0
3
6
12
(per Carrier )
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
UBBP FirstMode license (GSM) (per UBBP)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBBP MultiMode license (UMT S (per UBBP)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Antenn a
6
6
9
9
6
6
9
9
Typical Configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P Scenarios This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios. The following table describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 that is in 2T4R mode and supports 2x40 W output power in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios. Table 4-109 Typical configurations in 2.6A+1.8P/2.1P scenarios (2T4R 2x40 W) LTE Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Cabinet (optional)
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTa2
1
1
1
1
LBBPd 1
1
1
-
-
LBBPd 2
-
-
1
1
Baseba nd board
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
LTE Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
AAU3910 2.6 A +1.8 P/2.1 P
3
3
3
3
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
Resource block (required for the LBBPd2)
0
0
150
300
BB transmit channel (required for the LBBPd2)
0
0
6
6
Antenna
0
0
0
0
Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P Scenarios This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P scenario. The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P scenario.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
Table 4-110 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P scenario UMT S Confi gurati on
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
S2/2/2 /2/2/2
S4/4/4 /4/4/4
NonMIM O
NonMIM O
NonMIM O
MIM O
MIM O
2T4R
2T4R
20 W/ C
20 W/ C
20 W/ C
2x20 W/C
2x10 W/C
2x20 W/C
2x10 W/C
2T4R
2T4R
2x10 W/C
2x5 W/C
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMP Tb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBB Pf4
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
4
AAU3 902
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Multi Carrie r Licens e
0
3
9
3
9
3
9
9
21
0
3
9
6
9
6
9
9
21
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
0
0
(per Carrie r) Power Licens e (per 20W) AAS Virtua l Four Uplin k Chann els (per RU)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
4 Version Difference
UMT S Confi gurati on
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
S2/2/2 /2/2/2
S4/4/4 /4/4/4
NonMIM O
NonMIM O
NonMIM O
MIM O
MIM O
2T4R
2T4R
20 W/ C
20 W/ C
20 W/ C
2x20 W/C
2x10 W/C
2x20 W/C
2x10 W/C
2T4R
2T4R
2x10 W/C
2x5 W/C
AAS Vertic al Multip le Sector (per RU)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
4.5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles This section describes the capacity expansion principles for 3900 series base stations. The following table lists the capacity expansion principles for 3900 series base stations. Table 4-111 Capacity expansion principles Expansion Item
Principle
Radio frequency capacity
If the capacity to be expanded does not exceed the hardware capability, first expand the multi-carrier license and power, and then add RFUs and RRUs.
Baseband capacity
If the capacity to be expanded does not exceed the hardware capability, first expand the license, and then add baseband boards.
Transmission capacity
If more than four E1s/T1s or more than one FE electrical or optical port is required, add UTRP boards to provide more transmission ports when.
NOTE
For the typical configurations after capacity expansion, see 4.5.1 Typical Configurations.
Issue 06 (2014-03-26)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
